JP6257673B2 - Slot machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a slot machine capable of generating a predetermined winning according to a display result of a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable.

  As this type of slot machine, one described in Patent Document 1 has been proposed.

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-117075

An object of this invention is to provide the slot machine which can make a test device specify the aspect which shows derivation | leading-out operation in the recommended operation aspect .

In order to solve the above-described problem, a slot machine according to claim 1 of the present invention provides:
Equipped with a plurality of variable display parts that display fluctuations with a stepping motor,
After variably displaying the variable display part, the display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display part, and a winning can be generated according to the combination of the display results of the plurality of variable display parts, and the test of the game A slot machine capable of automatically playing a game in relation to input of a test signal from a test apparatus connected when performing,
The first board that controls the game is
Derivation control means for performing control for deriving a display result on a variable display unit corresponding to the derivation operation when a test derivation operation signal indicating the derivation operation is input;
A pre-determining means for deciding whether or not to allow the winning to occur before the display result is derived;
A determination result signal output control means for performing control to output a determination result signal for causing the test apparatus to specify the determination result of the prior determination means;
A step number specifying signal output control means for performing control to output a step number specifying signal for causing the test apparatus to specify the number of elapsed steps from the reference position of the stepping motor of each of the plurality of variable display units;
Determination result information output control means for performing control to output information based on the determination result of the prior determination means to the second substrate connected to the first substrate ;
Variable display start information output control means for performing control to output variable display start information to the second substrate in response to establishment of a variable display start condition;
Including
The second substrate includes derivation operation mode signal output control means for performing control to output a derivation operation mode signal for causing the test apparatus to specify an input mode of the test derivation operation signal,
The derivation operation mode signal is
A signal indicating the number of steps elapsed from the reference position of the stepping motor corresponding to the output timing of the test derivation operation signal for each of the plurality of variable display units,
When notification is made to indicate that the prior determination means has simultaneously determined that the first winning is permitted and the second winning that is more advantageous to the player than the first winning is determined. And a signal for instructing the input of the test derivation operation signal in a mode indicating the second derivation operation among the first derivation operation for generating the first prize and the second derivation operation for generating the second prize. ,
A signal instructing the input of the test derivation operation signal in a mode indicating a derivation operation in a predetermined derivation operation procedure when notification indicating the determination result of the prior determination means is not performed. It is a feature.

The slot machine of means 1 of the present invention is:
The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using game values (medals), and a variable display device that can variably display a plurality of types of symbols each of which can be identified ( Reel 2L, 2C, 2R) is a slot machine (slot machine 1) in which one game is finished by deriving the display result and winning can be generated according to the display result of the variable display device,
Before the display result of the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) is derived, the special winning (special role) accompanied by the transition to the special gaming state (BB, RB) advantageous for the player and the game Pre-determining means for deciding whether or not to allow a plurality of types of winnings including a re-game winning (re-playing player) with a re-playing (re-playing game) that can be played without using value (Internal lottery)
Determination that the occurrence of the special prize (special role) is permitted by the pre-determining means, and the occurrence of the special prize is not permitted when the special prize (special role) is not generated ( Carry-over means to carry over the special role winning flag) after the next game,
Display result corresponding to the special prize (special part) when it is determined that the special prize (special part) is allowed to occur and the replay prize (re-playing part) is allowed to occur Re-game winning priority derivation control means for leading the display result corresponding to the re-game winning (re-gamer) to the variable display device with priority.
The first display result (replay (8) in the initial gaming state controlled in accordance with establishment of a predetermined initialization condition (setting change, end of BB or RB, end of RT (1), end of RT (2)). ) To (10)), the pre-determining means makes a determination that the re-game winning (re-gamer) is allowed to occur with a higher probability than the initial game state. Replay high probability state transition means for transitioning to a replay high probability state (RT (1)) that is advantageous to the player;
After the replay high probability state (RT (1)) starts, the replay high probability state (RT (1)) is terminated when the number of digested games reaches the specified number of games (50 games). If the pre-determining means determines that the special winning (special role) is allowed to occur before the predetermined game number (50 games) is reached, the game is shifted to the initial gaming state. Re-game high probability state ending means for ending the re-game high probability state (RT (1)) when the predetermined game number (50 games) is reached without ending the game high probability state (RT (1)). When,
When the second display result (replay (1)) is derived in the initial gaming state, the normal gaming state (disadvantageous to the player who does not shift to the replaying high probability state (RT (1)) ( RT (2)) normal game state transition means,
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving the display result of the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R);
When the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated, the variable display device derives a display result according to the determination result of the prior determination means (internal lottery). When the determination result of the pre-article determination means is one of a plurality of types of specific results (replay GR (1) to (3)), the second display result (replay (1)) can be derived, When the determination result of the prior determination means is one of a plurality of types of specific results (replay GR (1) / replay GR (2) / replay GR (3)), it corresponds to another type of specific result. This is an operation procedure different from the avoidance procedure (middle, first reel first stop / left, right reel first stop / left, middle reel first stop), and the specified result of the determined type (replay GR (1) / Replay GR (2) / Replay When the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated in the avoidance procedure corresponding to R (3) (first stop of the left reel, first stop of the middle lease, first stop of the right reel) The display result (replay (4) to (8)) other than the second display result (replay (1)) is controlled to be derived by the variable display device, and the specified result of the determined type (replay GR) (1) / Replay GR (2) / Replay GR (3)) different operating procedures from the avoidance procedure (middle, first reel first stop / left, right reel first stop / left, middle reel first stop) ) Derivation control means for performing control to cause the variable display device to derive the second display result (replay (1)) when the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated in ,
Specification for notifying information that can identify the type of the determined specific result when the determination result of the prior determination means is one of a plurality of types of specific results (replay GR (1) to (3)) Result type notification means (stop order notification),
A right granting means for granting a right (super chance zone (SCZ)) to operate the specific result type notifying means (stop order notice);
In the initial gaming state, when the determination result of the prior determination unit is one of a plurality of types of specific results (any one of replay GR (1) to (3)), the right (SCZ) ) Is provided, notification operation control means for operating the specific result type notification means (stop order notification),
With
The pre-determining means allows the occurrence of the special prize in a state where the decision to allow the occurrence of the special prize is not carried over by the carryover means and the generation of the simultaneous allowable prize other than the special prize. Can be decided at the same time,
The slot machine is
Predetermined effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect in the replay high probability state;
Regardless of whether it is determined to allow the occurrence of the special winning when it is determined to allow the simultaneous allowable winning in the re-playing high probability state, the effect mode of the predetermined effect Production mode change determining means for determining whether or not to change,
When it is determined that the effect mode is changed by the effect mode change determining means, the effect mode changing means for changing the effect mode of the predetermined effect;
This is an effect different from the predetermined effect, and after the start of the replay high probability state (RT (1)), the number of remaining games up to the specified number of games (50 games) has become the predetermined number of games (6 games). Sometimes, it is determined that the generation of the special prize (special role) is allowed until the specified number of games (50 games) is reached, and the specific result type notification means (stop order notification) is activated. This suggests the possibility that a right (SCZ) has been granted, and finally activates whether or not the occurrence of the special prize (special role) is permitted and the specific result type notification means (stop order notification). A specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect (battle effect) for notifying whether or not a right (SCZ) is granted;
Further comprising
On the condition that the specific effect execution means is allowed to generate the special prize (special role) or is granted a right (SCZ) to operate the specific result type notification means (stop order notification). Among the multiple stages of the specific stage (battle stage), the first stage (enemy appearance) and the second stage (friend appearance) of the initial stage stage (second game stage stage) It is characterized by performing two productions (friend appearance).
According to this feature, even if it is determined by the pre-determining means that the occurrence of the special prize is permitted in the replay high probability state, the replay high probability state does not end, and the special prize allowed during that time is replayed. It is carried over to the end of the high probability state, and in the replay high probability state, there is a high probability that a replay win that is given priority over the special win is allowed, and whether or not a special win is allowed is determined. Since it becomes difficult to discriminate, it can be expected that a special winning is allowed at the end of the replay high probability state. On the other hand, even if the occurrence of a special prize is not allowed at the end of the replay high probability state, if the right to operate the specific result type notification means is granted, the subsequent game state shifts to the normal game state. When a specific result that may lead to the second display result is determined, the type of the specific result is notified, and an operation procedure that avoids derivation of the second display result can be specified. It becomes possible to shift to the replay high probability state again. In addition to the special effects executed at the end of the replay high probability state, in addition to enhancing the player's expectation that a special prize will be allowed at the end of the replay high probability state, Even if the occurrence of a prize is not permitted, the right to operate the specific result type notification means, i.e., the right to shift to the re-gaming high probability state again without shifting to the normal gaming state in the subsequent initial gaming state. It is possible to increase the player's expectation for what is given.
In addition, whether or not a special prize is allowed to be generated by executing the second effect instead of the first effect in the initial stage effect among the multiple stages of the effect that constitutes the specific effect is notified. Since any one of the rights to operate the means is determined, the player's attention can be drawn from the initial stage of the specific performance.

Note that the predetermined number of bets is at least one bet number, and a game can be started by setting a bet number of two or more or setting a maximum bet number. good. Further, the game may be started by setting a bet amount determined according to a plurality of game states.
In addition, as a predetermined end condition that the normal gaming state is to be terminated, for example, after the normal gaming state is started, a predetermined number of games is reached, or a predetermined winning is generated, For example, the display result of the variable display device becomes a predetermined display result, it is determined that the special winning is permitted, the special winning is generated, and the like.
Further, the predetermined initialization condition is that the game state is initialized, that is, the storage means such as a RAM storing the game state is initialized, the special game state is terminated, and the re-game high probability state And the normal gaming state end.
In addition, the replay high probability state advantageous to the player means, for example, a game result obtained as a result of the game with respect to the number of game values used for setting the bet number than the initial game state or the normal game state. A gaming state having a high grant rate per game, which is a ratio of the number of values, corresponds to this.
In addition, the normal gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player corresponds to, for example, a gaming state in which the grant rate per game is lower than the high replay probability state.
The first display result and the second display result may be a display result corresponding to a winning or a display result not corresponding to a winning. Moreover, if it is the former, the display result corresponding to the said re-game winning may be sufficient, and the display result corresponding to the small part winning accompanied with provision of a game value may be sufficient.
In addition, the plurality of types of specific results include a determination to allow the generation of a prize that allows each type of second display result to be derived when the second display result includes a plurality of types, and the second display result. In the case of simultaneously determining whether to allow the generation of a prize from which a result can be derived and to allow the generation of other prizes, the determination includes different combinations of winnings determined simultaneously.
Further, the specific result type notifying unit only needs to notify information that can identify the type of the specific result determined by the prior determination unit, and information indicating the type of the specific result determined directly. It may be information that can be identified, or information that can identify the type of the determined specific result by notifying the avoidance procedure corresponding to the determined result of the determined type.

The slot machine according to means 2 of the present invention is the slot machine according to means 1,
The specific effect is determined by determining whether the special winning (special role) is allowed by winning the ally or ally and not allowing the team to win the special prize (special role). Notification) is given the right to operate (SCZ), and when the ally loses, the special prize (special role) is not allowed to be generated, and the specific result type notification means (stop order notification) ) Is an effect (battle effect) indicating that the right to operate (SCZ) is not granted,
On the condition that the specific effect execution means is allowed to generate the special prize (special role) or is granted a right (SCZ) to operate the specific result type notification means (stop order notification). As the second effect, an effect (a friend appearance) showing the superiority of the teammate is executed in the initial stage (the effect of the second game).
According to this feature, when the specific performance starts from a development that is advantageous to the player, it is determined whether the special winning is permitted or the right to operate the specific type notification means is granted. Therefore, the development of the production matches the notification content, and the content indicated by the specific production is easy to understand.
The specific effect may be an effect in which a single game is played during the specific effect, or may be an effect in which a plurality of matches are performed and a final result is derived.
In addition, the direction indicating the superiority of the ally is an effect suggesting that the ally wins or the ally will not be defeated. If it is the structure which only appears and is not defeated finally, the appearance of the ally at the initial stage itself is an effect indicating the superiority of the ally.

The slot machine of means 3 of the present invention is the slot machine according to means 1 or 2,
A slot machine capable of automatically playing a game based on a test signal input from a test apparatus (test apparatus 1300) connected when performing a game test,
Granted game value signal output control means for performing control for outputting a given game value signal (payout count signal) indicating the number of given game values to the test device (test device 1300);
Recommended derivation operation mode signal (stop execution) indicating the input mode (stop order, stop timing) of the test derivation operation signal (reel stop switch signal) indicating the operation of the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) Recommended derivation operation mode signal output means for performing control for outputting a position signal and a stop reel designation signal) to the test apparatus (test apparatus 1300);
With
In the initial gaming state, the recommended derivation operation mode signal output means is one of a plurality of types of specific results (any one of replay GR (1) to (3)). When the specific result type notification means (stop order notification) is activated, the avoidance procedure corresponding to the determined type of specific result (replay GR (1) / replay GR (2) / replay GR (3)). Recommended derivation operation mode signal (stop) for instructing the input of a test derivation operation signal (reel stop switch signal) indicating the derivation operation at (first stop of left reel, first stop of middle lease, first stop of right reel) Control for outputting an execution position signal and a stop reel designation signal) to the test apparatus (test apparatus 1300) is performed.
According to this feature, even when there are a plurality of operation procedures of the derivation operation means that the player can select when the type of the specific result is notified, the derivation operation in the derivation operation procedure that is advantageous among them is shown. Since the recommended derivation operation mode signal is output to the test apparatus, even when there are a plurality of operation procedures of the derivation operation means that the player can select when the type of the specific result is notified, the test apparatus It is possible to output a test derivation operation signal in a manner showing a derivation operation in an operation procedure that is advantageous to the player on the side, and a grant rate close to the game value grant rate in the market by a test with a test device Can be obtained.

The slot machine of means 4 is the slot machine according to any of means 1 to 3,
After the transition to the normal game state (RT (2)), when the specific display result (replay (2) (3)) is derived, the normal game state (RT (2)) is terminated and the initial game It is characterized by comprising a normal gaming state ending means for shifting to a state.
According to this feature, when the specific display result is derived in the normal gaming state, the normal gaming state is terminated, and the player enters the initial gaming state where there is a possibility of transitioning to the re-gaming high probability state. Even in a disadvantageous normal gaming state, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for shifting to a re-gaming high probability state.
Note that the specific display result may be a display result corresponding to a winning or a display result not corresponding to a winning. Moreover, if it is the former, the display result corresponding to the said re-game winning may be sufficient, and the display result corresponding to the small part winning accompanied with provision of a game value may be sufficient.

The slot machine according to means 5 is the slot machine according to means 4,
The derivation control means determines the specific display result (replay (2) (3) when it is determined by the prior determination means (internal lottery) that the specific winning (replay (2) (3)) is allowed to occur. )) Is derived, and
The predetermination means (internal lottery) generates the special prize (special role) to allow the occurrence of the specific prize (replay (2) (3)) in the normal gaming state (RT (2)). It can be determined at the same time as allowing
According to this feature, when the specific display result is derived in the normal gaming state, not only the normal gaming state which is disadvantageous for the player is ended, but also the expectation that the occurrence of a special prize is allowed is increased. be able to.

The slot machine of means 6 is the slot machine according to means 4 or 5,
The derivation control means determines the specific display result (replay (2) (3) when it is determined by the prior determination means (internal lottery) that the specific winning (replay (2) (3)) is allowed to occur. )) Is derived, and
The pre-determining means (internal lottery) determines that the special winning (replay (2) (3)) is allowed to occur in the replay high probability state (RT (1)). It is also characterized by always determining at the same time that a winning (special role) is allowed.
According to this feature, if the specific display result that would end the normal gaming state if the normal gaming state is disadvantageous to the player is derived in a re-play high probability state advantageous to the player, Since it is determined that the occurrence of a special prize is permitted, even if the occurrence of a specific prize is allowed in a gaming state other than the normal gaming state, there will be no wasteful withdrawal and the gaming state other than the normal gaming state is not. However, it is possible to enhance the expectation that the specific display result is derived.

The slot machine of means 7 is the slot machine according to any one of means 4 to 6,
The derivation control means derives the first display results (replays (8) to (10)) when a predetermined result (replay GR (4)) is determined by the prior determination means (internal lottery). Control and
The specific display result comprises a plurality of types of specific display results (replay (2) (3)),
The pre-determining means (internal lottery) is the specific display that triggered the transition to the initial gaming state in the initial gaming state in which the specific display result is derived and shifted in the normal gaming state (RT (2)). The predetermined result (replay GR (4) and / or the specific result (replay GR (1) to (3)) is determined with different probabilities depending on the type of result (replay (2), replay (3)). It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, depending on the type of the specific display result that triggered the transition from the normal gaming state to the initial gaming state, the ratio of transition from the initial gaming state to the re-gaming high probability state and / or the normal gaming state is Because it is different, the game flow can be sharpened.

The slot machine of the means 8 is the slot machine according to any one of the means 1 to 7,
After the normal gaming state (RT (2)) is started, the normal gaming state (RT (2)) is terminated when a predetermined ending condition (reach of specified number of games, winning of a winning combination) is established. Normal game state ending means for shifting to the initial game state;
Special post-initial game state transition means for transitioning to the initial game state after the end of the special game state (BB, RB);
With
The derivation control means derives the first display results (replays (8) to (10)) when a predetermined result (replay GR (4)) is determined by the prior determination means (internal lottery). Control and
The pre-determining means (internal lottery) is an initial gaming state shifted from the normal gaming state (RT (2)) or an initial gaming state shifted after the special gaming state (BB, RB) ends. The predetermined result (replay GR (4) and / or the specific result (replay GR (1) to (3)) is determined with different probabilities depending on whether or not.
According to this feature, depending on whether the initial gaming state is shifted from the normal gaming state or the initial gaming state is shifted after the end of the special gaming state, the re-gaming high probability state and / or the normal gaming state is entered. Since the rate of transition is different, the game flow can be sharpened.

The slot machine of means 9 is the slot machine according to any of means 1 to 3,
After the normal gaming state (RT (2)) starts, when the specific display result (replay (2) (3)) is derived, the normal gaming state (RT (2)) is terminated, and the An end re-transition that shifts to the end re-game high probability state (end RT) in which a decision to allow the occurrence of a game prize (re-playing combination) is made with a higher probability than the normal game state (RT (2)). Game high probability state transition means,
After the end replay high probability state (end RT) is started, when the predetermined number of games is reached, the end replay high probability state (end RT) is ended to shift to the initial game state. Ending replay high probability state ending means,
It is characterized by having.
According to this feature, when the specific display result is derived in the normal gaming state, the transition is made to the initial gaming state that may transition to the re-gaming high probability state again through the ending re-gaming high probability state. Even in the normal gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for shifting to the re-gaming high probability state.
Note that the specific display result may be a display result corresponding to a winning or a display result not corresponding to a winning. Moreover, if it is the former, the display result corresponding to the said re-game winning may be sufficient, and the display result corresponding to the small part winning accompanied with provision of a game value may be sufficient.

The slot machine of means 10 is the slot machine according to means 9,
After the start of the normal gaming state (RT (2)), when it is determined to allow the occurrence of the special prize (special role), the normal gaming state (RT (2)) is terminated, Special to shift to the high probability state of replay at the time of special decision (RT after winning) in which the decision to allow the occurrence of a replay prize (replaying role) is made with a higher probability than the normal gaming state (RT (2)) It has a re-playing high probability state transition means at the time of decision,
The derivation control means determines the specific display result (replay (2) (3) when it is determined by the prior determination means (internal lottery) that the specific winning (replay (2) (3)) is allowed to occur. )) Is derived, and
The pre-determining means (internal lottery) generates the special prize (special role) to permit the derivation of the specific display result (replay (2) (3)) in the normal gaming state (RT (2)). Can be determined at the same time as
The slot machine generates the special prize (special role) for a plurality of games after transitioning to the replay high probability state for termination (RT for termination) or the high probability state for replay at the time of special decision (RT after winning). It is further characterized by further comprising continuous performance execution means for executing a continuous performance that suggests the possibility of being allowed.
According to this feature, when the specific display result is derived in the normal gaming state, not only the normal gaming state which is disadvantageous for the player is ended, but also the expectation that the occurrence of a special prize is allowed is increased. be able to. In addition, after the specific display result is derived in the normal gaming state, it is controlled to the replaying high probability state for ending, and during this time, when the special winning is permitted, the replaying high probability state at the time of special decision is entered. It is difficult to determine whether it has transitioned, or whether the transition to the replaying high probability state for ending has occurred due to the fact that the occurrence of a specific winning is permitted independently and the specific display result has been derived. Since the continuous performance is executed, it is possible to effectively maintain the player's expectation that the special winning is permitted.

The slot machine according to means 11 is the slot machine according to means 10, wherein
When it is determined that the specific winning (replay (2) (3)) is newly allowed before the end of the continuous production, the remaining production contents (combination of production patterns) are changed. Yes.
According to this feature, there is a continuous production that starts when a specific display result is derived that suggests that it is possible to simultaneously determine that a special winning is allowed in the normal gaming state, that is, a special winning is generated. When it is determined that the specific prize is allowed to occur before the end of the continuous performance showing the possibility of being allowed, that is, when an event that further increases the possibility that the special prize is allowed is generated. In addition, the content of the production of the continuous production also changes accordingly, so that the player's expectation for the occurrence of the special prize can be effectively enhanced according to the event that occurred during the continuous production.

The slot machine of means 12 is the slot machine according to any one of means 9 to 11,
A special post-initial game state transition means for transitioning to the initial game state after completion of the special game state (BB, RB);
The derivation control means derives the first display results (replays (8) to (10)) when a predetermined result (replay GR (4)) is determined by the prior determination means (internal lottery). Control and
The pre-determining means (internal lottery) is an initial game state shifted from the end replay high probability state (end RT), or an initial game shifted after the special game state (BB, RB) ends. The predetermined result (replay GR (4) and / or the specific result (replay GR (1) to (3)) is determined with different probabilities depending on whether it is a state or not.
According to this feature, depending on whether the game state is the initial game state that has transitioned from the normal game state through the end replay high probability state, or the initial game state that has transitioned after the end of the special game state, Since the rate of transition to the probability state and / or the normal gaming state is different, the game flow can be sharpened.

The slot machine of means 13 is the slot machine according to any of means 1 to 12,
After the normal gaming state (RT (2)) is started, the normal gaming state (RT (2)) is terminated when the number of games digested reaches a predetermined number of games (999 games). Normal game state ending means for shifting to the initial game state;
An effect probability mode changing means for selecting a plurality of kinds of effect probability modes (lottery modes) having different probabilities of executing a predetermined effect (specific suggestion effect), and changing the selected effect probability mode (lottery mode);
With
The effect probability mode changing means sets the high probability mode in which the probability of executing the predetermined effect (specific suggestion effect) is higher than that of other types of effect probability modes (lottery mode) in the normal gaming state (RT (2 )) Is started, and the remaining number of games up to the predetermined number of games (999 games) is less than the predetermined number of games (100 games), the remaining number of games is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of games (100 games). It is characterized by selecting at a higher rate than in the case of.
According to this feature, as the end of the normal gaming state approaches, the rate at which the high probability mode is selected increases and the appearance frequency of the predetermined effect increases, so that the normal game state ends when the predetermined effect appears frequently. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation for the transition to the initial gaming state where there is a possibility of transition to the re-gaming high probability state.

The slot machine of means 14 is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 13,
After the normal gaming state (RT (2)) is started, when the predetermined ending condition is satisfied (digestion of the prescribed number of games, winning the winning combination), the normal gaming state (RT (2)) is ended. Normal game state ending means for shifting to the initial game state;
An effect probability mode changing means for selecting a plurality of kinds of effect probability modes (lottery modes) having different probabilities of executing a predetermined effect (specific suggestion effect), and changing the selected effect probability mode (lottery mode);
With
The effect probability mode changing means selects a high probability mode in which the probability of executing the predetermined effect (specific suggestion effect) is higher than that of other types of effect probability modes (lottery mode) in the initial game state. It is characterized by selecting at a higher rate than the state (RT (2)).
According to this feature, in the initial gaming state, the higher probability mode is selected than in the normal gaming state, and the appearance frequency of the predetermined effect increases, so that the normal gaming state is terminated by frequent occurrence of the predetermined effect. That is, it is possible to increase a sense of expectation for the transition to the initial gaming state where there is a possibility of transitioning to the replay high probability state.

The slot machine of means 15 is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 14,
After the normal gaming state (RT (2)) is started, the normal gaming state (RT (2)) is terminated when the number of games digested reaches a predetermined number of games (999 games). Normal game state ending means for shifting to the initial game state;
A background changing means for selecting a background of the effect by the image from a plurality of different backgrounds (day, evening, night) and changing to the selected background;
With
The background changing means is configured to determine a specific background (evening, evening) among the plurality of types of backgrounds (day, evening, night) after the normal gaming state (RT (2)) has started. When the remaining number of games up to the number of games (999 games) is less than the predetermined number of games (100 games), the game is selected at a higher rate than when the remaining number of games is equal to or more than the predetermined number of games (100 games). It is characterized by.
According to this feature, the rate at which a specific background is selected increases as the end of the normal gaming state approaches, so that the normal gaming state ends when the production background changes to a specific background, and the replay high probability state It is possible to enhance the expectation for shifting to the initial gaming state where there is a possibility of shifting to.

The slot machine of means 16 is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 15,
After the normal gaming state (RT (2)) is started, when the predetermined ending condition is satisfied (digestion of the prescribed number of games, winning the winning combination), the normal gaming state (RT (2)) is ended. Normal game state ending means for shifting to the initial game state;
A background changing means for selecting a background of the effect by the image from a plurality of different backgrounds (day, evening, night) and changing to the selected background;
With
The background changing means has a higher ratio of a specific background (evening, evening) of the plurality of types of backgrounds (day, evening, night) in the initial gaming state than in the normal gaming state (RT (2)). It is characterized by selecting with.
According to this feature, in the initial gaming state, the ratio that the specific background is selected is higher than that in the normal gaming state, so that the normal gaming state is ended by changing the production background to the specific background, that is, It is possible to increase the expectation for the transition to the initial gaming state where there is a possibility of transition to the re-gaming high probability state.

The slot machine of means 17 is the slot machine according to means 15 or 16,
The background changing means is characterized in that the specific background (evening, night) is selected at a higher rate in the high probability mode than in other types of performance probability modes (lottery mode).
According to this feature, in the state where the end of the normal gaming state is near or in the initial gaming state, the appearance frequency of the predetermined effect increases, and the appearance frequency of the predetermined effect increases to be a specific background synergistically. Since the ratio also increases, it can be estimated whether the end of the normal gaming state is near or the initial gaming state from the appearance frequency of the predetermined effect and the background of the effect.

The slot machine of means 18 is the slot machine according to any of means 15 to 17,
The effect probability mode changing means selects the high probability mode at a higher rate when the background of the effect by the image is the specific background (evening, night) than when it is another background (daytime). It is characterized by.
According to this feature, in the state in which the normal gaming state is almost finished or in the initial gaming state, the ratio of the specific background increases and the ratio of the specific background increases to synergistically appear the predetermined effect. Since the frequency also increases, it can be inferred from the appearance frequency of the predetermined effect and the background of the effect whether the normal game state is almost finished or the initial game state.

The slot machine according to means 19 is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 18, wherein
There is provided a production probability mode changing means for selecting a plurality of types of production probability modes (lottery modes) having different probabilities of executing a predetermined production (specific suggestion production), and changing the selected production probability mode (lottery mode).
The effect probability mode changing means determines that the special prize (special part) is to be permitted when it is determined that the special prize (special part) is allowed to be generated in the replay high probability state (RT (1)). A high probability mode in which the probability that the predetermined effect (specific suggestion effect) is executed at a higher rate than in the case where it is not determined that the occurrence is permitted is higher than other types of effect probability modes (lottery mode). It is characterized by selection.
According to this feature, in the replay high probability state, when the occurrence of a special prize is permitted, the appearance frequency of a predetermined effect is higher than when it is not permitted. As a result of the frequent occurrence of the game, it is possible to effectively enhance the player's expectation that the occurrence of a special prize is permitted after the end of the replay high probability state.

The slot machine of means 20 is the slot machine of means 19,
The performance probability mode changing means may determine whether to allow the special winning (special role) at the same time as allowing the special winning (special role) in the replay high probability state (RT (1)). Is determined to be permitted (cherry, cherry + 1 sheet, replay GR (4), replay GR (5)), the simultaneous allowable winning is permitted (cherry, cherry + 1 sheet, replay) The high probability mode is selected at a higher rate than when GR (4) and replay GR (5)) are not determined.
According to this feature, when it is determined that the simultaneous allowable winnings are allowed to occur in the re-playing high probability state, that is, when an event that further increases the possibility that the special winnings are allowed is generated, At the same time, the appearance frequency of a predetermined effect is also increased, so that the player's sense of expectation for the occurrence of a special prize can be effectively increased in accordance with an event that has occurred in the replay high probability state.

The slot machine of means 21 is the slot machine according to any of means 1 to 18,
A background changing means for selecting a background of the effect produced by the image from a plurality of different backgrounds (day, evening, night) and changing to the selected background,
The background changing means determines the occurrence of the special prize (special part) when it is determined that the special prize (special part) is allowed to occur in the replay high probability state (RT (1)). It is characterized in that a specific background (evening, night) is selected from the plurality of types of backgrounds (day, evening, night) at a higher rate than when it is not determined to permit.
According to this feature, in the replay high probability state, when the occurrence of a special prize is allowed, the ratio of the specific background being selected becomes high. By changing to the background, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation that the special winning is permitted after the end of the high replay probability state.

The slot machine according to means 22 is the slot machine according to means 21,
The background changing means may generate simultaneous allowable winnings that may be determined to be allowed at the same time as allowing the special winnings (special roles) to be allowed in the replay high probability state (RT (1)). (Cherry, Cherry + 1, Replay GR (4), Replay GR (5)) is determined to be allowed (Cherry, Cherry + 1, Replay GR ( 4) The specific background (evening, night) is selected at a higher rate than when the replay GR (5)) is not determined.
According to this feature, when it is determined that the simultaneous allowable winnings are allowed to occur in the re-playing high probability state, that is, when an event that further increases the possibility that the special winnings are allowed is generated, At the same time, since the ratio of selecting a specific background is increased, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation for the occurrence of a special prize according to the event that has occurred in the replay high probability state.

The slot machine of means 23 is the slot machine according to any of means 1 to 22,
By means of an effect probability mode changing means and / or an image for selecting a plurality of types of effect probability modes (lottery) with different probabilities of executing a predetermined effect (specific suggestion effect) and changing to the selected effect probability mode (lottery mode) Select a background for the production from multiple different types of backgrounds (daytime, evening, night)
The effect probability mode changing means and / or the background changing means is an effect probability mode (low probability mode) defined as an initial setting when power is turned on (when the sub CPU 91a is activated) and / or a background (as a default setting). After the power is turned on (after activation of the sub CPU 91a), a new performance probability mode (lottery mode) and / or background is selected at a higher rate than the other games in the first game, and the selected new It is characterized by changing to production probability mode (lottery mode) and / or background.
According to this feature, the appearance frequency of a predetermined effect and / or the background of the effect is likely to be changed in the first game after the game store is opened. The background can be scattered.

The slot machine of means 24 is the slot machine of means 23,
Advantage of selecting and setting one of a plurality of setting values (1 to 6) having different advantages for a player based on an operation (setting change operation) of a predetermined setting operation means Degree setting means,
The effect probability mode changing means and / or the background changing means, when selecting a new effect probability mode (lottery mode) and / or background in the first game after the power is turned on (after activation of the sub CPU 91a), It is characterized by selecting with different probabilities according to the set value set by the advantage setting means.
According to this feature, the set value can be estimated based on the effect state of the slot machine immediately after opening the amusement store, so that the operation of the slot machine immediately after opening can be improved.

The slot machine of means 25 is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 24,
An effect probability mode changing means for selecting a plurality of kinds of effect probability modes (lottery modes) having different probabilities of executing a predetermined effect (specific suggestion effect), and changing the selected effect probability mode (lottery mode);
A background changing means for selecting a background of the effect by the image from a plurality of different backgrounds (day, evening, night) and changing to the selected background;
With
The background changing means is characterized in that the background is selected in response to the predetermined effect (specific suggestion effect) and is changed to the selected background.
According to this feature, since the background of the effect changes through a predetermined effect, the frequency at which the effect background changes due to the difference in the effect probability mode, i.e., the frequency at which the gaming state or the setting value can be estimated by the effect background. Can be attached.

The slot machine of means 26 is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 25,
Replay high probability effect executing means for executing a replay high probability effect (effect during RT) peculiar to the replay high probability state during the replay high probability state (RT (1));
At the start of the replay high probability state (RT (1)), a game state other than the normal game state (RT (2)) is continued without shifting to the normal game state (RT (2)). Whether or not the net added value (net added number) obtained by subtracting the gaming value used for setting the number of bets from the gaming value given to the player in the period (loop period) exceeds a predetermined value (1000) A replay high probability predetermined value determination means for determining whether or not
With
The replay high probability effect executing means is configured such that the replay high probability predetermined value determination means has a predetermined value (1000) that the net added value (net increase number) at the start of the replay high probability state (RT (1)). A special replay high probability effect (during the special RT) as the replay high probability effect (RT effect) in the replay high probability state (RT (1)) It is characterized by performing (directing).
According to this feature, the gaming value and the renewal increased during a period in which a gaming state other than the normal gaming state continues without shifting to the normal gaming state, that is, a period in which a state advantageous to the player continues. Since the game high probability effect changes in relation to the game, it is possible to effectively enhance the player's sense of accomplishment and superiority with respect to the fact that the player has gained a lot of game value.

The slot machine of means 27 is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 26,
Special effect execution means for executing a special effect (effect during BB, effect during RB) peculiar to the special game state during the special game state (BB, RB);
A period during which a game state other than the normal game state (RT (2)) continues at the start of the special game state (BB, RB) without shifting to the normal game state (RT (2)) (loop) Determine whether or not the net added value (net added number) obtained by subtracting the gaming value used for setting the number of bets from the gaming value given to the player in the period) exceeds a predetermined value (1000) Special time predetermined value judging means to perform,
With
The special effect execution means determines that the special value predetermined value determination means determines that the net added value (net increase number) exceeds a predetermined value (1000) at the start of the special gaming state (BB, RB). On the condition that a special special effect (special BB effect, special RB effect) is executed as the special effect (effect during BB, effect during RB) of the special game state (BB, RB). Yes.
According to this feature, the gaming value and the special value increased during a period in which a gaming state other than the normal gaming state continues without shifting to the normal gaming state, that is, a period in which a state advantageous to the player continues. Since the performance changes in relation to the performance, it is possible to effectively enhance the player's sense of accomplishment and superiority with respect to the fact that the player has acquired a lot of gaming value.

The slot machine of means 28 is the slot machine according to any of means 1 to 27,
For a game given to a player during a period (loop period) in which a game state other than the normal game state (RT (2)) continues without shifting to the normal game state (RT (2)) The net added value (net added number) obtained by subtracting the gaming value used for setting the wager number from the value exceeds a predetermined value (2000), and the re-game high probability state (RT) in the period (loop period) It is characterized by comprising special effect execution means for executing a special effect (mass acquisition effect) on the condition that the number of times of transition to (1)) exceeds a predetermined number (10 times).
According to this feature, the special effect is a game that has increased in a period in which a game state other than the normal game state continues without shifting to the normal game state, that is, a period in which a state advantageous to the player continues. If the value of the utility value exceeds the predetermined value and the condition of high difficulty that the number of times of transition to the replay high probability state exceeds the predetermined number is not achieved, it will not be executed. Effective player's sense of accomplishment and superiority not only for acquiring a lot of gaming value and having made many consecutive transitions to a high probability of replaying, but also for achieving more difficult conditions Can be increased.

The slot machine of means 29 is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 28,
In the special gaming state (BB), when the total number of gaming values given to the player in the special gaming state (BB) exceeds the upper limit (300), the special gaming state (BB) is changed. A special game state ending means for ending,
A right grant determining means (SCZ lottery) for determining whether or not to grant the right (SCZ) in the special gaming state (BB);
With
The right granting determination means (SCZ lottery) is performed in advance of the special gaming state (BB) until the number of games that have been consumed reaches a specified value (25 games) or in the special gaming state (BB). The right (until the total number of gaming values given to the player reaches the specified value (375) when the winning means permitted by the determining means (internal lottery) are considered to have won. It is characterized by determining whether to give SCZ).
According to this feature, even if the end of the special gaming state is delayed without generating a prize in the special gaming state, the game for determining whether or not to grant the right is restricted by the right granting determination means. In addition, it is possible to prevent the operation of the slot machine from being lowered by delaying the end of the special gaming state.

The slot machine of means 30 is the slot machine of means 29,
The right granting determination means (SCZ lottery) is configured such that after the start of the special gaming state (BB), the upper limit is the total number of gaming values given to the player in the special gaming state (BB). The winning allowed by the pre-determining means until reaching the specified value (25 games) larger than the number of games (21 games) required to exceed the value (300) or in the special gaming state (BB) The right (SCZ) is granted until the total number of game values given to the player reaches a specified value (375) that is greater than the upper limit (300) when all the players are considered to have won. It is characterized by determining whether or not to do so.
According to this feature, in the special gaming state, the opportunity to receive a determination as to whether or not to grant the right by the right granting means is increased by slightly delaying the end of the special gaming state without generating a prize. Since a strategy element is added depending on how the state game proceeds, it is possible to enhance interest.

The slot machine of means 31 is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 30,
Special effect execution means for executing a special effect (effect during BB) peculiar to the special game state during the special game state (BB);
A right grant determining means (SCZ lottery) for determining whether or not to grant the right in the special gaming state (BB);
Right grant determination notification means (SCZ winning notification) for notifying whether or not the right (SCZ) has been granted by the right grant determination means (SCZ lottery) in the special effect (effect during BB);
A special effect selection means for selecting any type (BB mode) special effect (in-BB effect) from a plurality of types of special effects (BB modes (A) to (C)) by a player's operation;
With
The right grant determination means (SCZ lottery) determines whether or not to grant the right (SCZ) at a decision timing determined corresponding to the type of special effect (BB mode) selected by the special effect selection means. Decide
The right grant determination notification means (SCZ winning notification) is provided by the right grant determination means (SCZ lottery) at a notification timing determined corresponding to the type of special effect (BB mode) selected by the special effect selection means. A notification is made as to whether or not the right (SCZ) has been granted.
According to this feature, it is determined whether or not to grant the right to operate the specific result type notification means in the special gaming state, and the result is notified in a special performance. Can be increased. Also, the timing at which it is determined whether or not to grant the right to operate the specific result type notification means changes depending on the type of special effect selected by the player, so that the player is actively participating in the game. Can raise awareness. In addition, since the determination timing for determining whether or not to grant the right to operate the specific result type notification means and the notification timing at which the result is notified are determined according to the type of the special effect, these The determination timing and the notification timing can be properly associated.

The slot machine of means 32 is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 31,
Special effect execution means for executing a special effect (effect during BB) peculiar to the special game state during the special game state (BB);
Right grant determination notification means (SCZ winning notification) to notify in the special effect (effect during BB),
With
The right granting means can grant the right (SCZ) before the transition to the special gaming state (BB).
The special effect execution means is configured so that the right (SCZ) before the transition to the special gaming state (BB) is provided on the condition that the right (SCZ) is granted before the transition to the special gaming state (BB). ) Is not granted, it is characterized by executing a right determination special effect (effect during SCZ determination BB) that is not executed.
According to this feature, in most cases, the right to operate the specific result type notification means is given in the special gaming state, but when a special special effect is executed in the special gaming state, Without waiting for the decision, since it is determined that the right is granted at the same time as the start of the special performance, it is possible to give the player an unexpected feeling.

The slot machine of means 33 is the slot machine according to any of means 1 to 32,
When the first display result (replays (8) to (10)) is derived in the initial gaming state, the re-gaming height for notifying the transition to the re-gaming high probability state (RT (1)) Probability state transition notification means (RT transition notification effect),
The derivation control means derives the first display results (replays (8) to (10)) when a predetermined result (replay GR (4)) is determined by the prior determination means (internal lottery). Control and
The pre-determining means (internal lottery) can simultaneously determine that the predetermined result (replay GR (4)) in the initial gaming state allows the occurrence of the special prize (special role),
The replay high probability state transition means simultaneously determines that the predetermined result (replay GR (4)) and the special prize (special combination) are allowed to be generated in the initial game state, and the first display result When (Replay (8) to (10)) is derived, the replay high probability state (RT (1)) is not transferred,
The re-game high probability state transition notification means (RT transition notification effect) simultaneously determines that the predetermined result (replay GR (4)) and the special winning (special role) are allowed to be generated in the initial gaming state. When the first display result (replays (8) to (10)) is derived, after notifying that the transition to the replay high probability state (RT (1)) is made, the special prize ( It is characterized by notifying that it is decided to allow the occurrence of special roles.
According to this feature, when the first display result is derived in the initial gaming state, the transition to the re-gaming high probability state is originally made, but the occurrence of a special prize is allowed simultaneously with the predetermined result. In other words, if the transition to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the high probability of replaying is permitted, the transition to a gaming state that is more advantageous in stages is permitted. Therefore, the player's interest can be further enhanced as compared with the case of notifying that the occurrence of a special prize is permitted from the beginning.

The slot machine of means 34 is the slot machine according to any of means 1 to 33,
The pre-determining means (internal lottery) has a plurality of types of first predetermined results (replay (1) + replay (8), replay (1) + replay (9), replay (1) + replay (10)). And a second predetermined result (replay GR (4)) can be determined,
The derivation control means includes
The determination result of the prior determination means is any one of a plurality of types of first predetermined results (replay (1) + replay (8), replay (1) + replay (9), replay (1) + replay (10)). The first display result (replay (8) to (10)) can be derived and any kind of first predetermined result (replay (1) + replay (8) / replay) When (1) + replay (9) / replay (1) + replay (10)) is determined, another type of first predetermined result (replay (1) + replay (9), replay (1) + Replay (10) / Replay (1) + Replay (8), Replay (1) + Replay (10) / Replay (1) + Replay (8), Replay (1) + Replay (9)) The procedure is different from the procedure. Derivation procedure (“black 7”) corresponding to the first predetermined result of the type (replay (1) + replay (8) / replay (1) + replay (9) / replay (1) + replay (10)) When the operation of the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is performed in the pull-in range of “/ net 7” / stop operation of the left reel in the pull-in range of “BAR”. The display result of 1 (replay (8) / replay (9) / replay (10)) is controlled to be derived by the variable display device, and the first predetermined result of the determined type (replay (1) + replay) (8) / Replay (1) + Replay (9) / Replay (1) + Replay (10)) different operation procedure (“Black 7” out of range / “Net 7” withdraw) Out of range / Left outside of BAR pull-in range Display operation (replay (1)) other than the first display result when the operation of the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is performed in the variable display device. Control to derive,
When the second predetermined result (replay GR (4)) is determined by the prior determination means, the plurality of types of first predetermined results (replay (1) + replay (8), replay (1) ) + Replay (9), replay (1) + replay (10)) of any derivation procedure ("black 7" draw range, "net 7" draw range, "BAR" When the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated in the left reel at any timing of the pull-in range, the first display result (replay (8) to ( 10)) is controlled to be derived by the variable display device,
The pre-determining means (internal lottery) includes the first predetermined result (replay (1) + replay (8), replay (1) + replay (9), replay (1) + replay (10)) and the above It is possible to simultaneously determine that only the second predetermined result (Replay GR (4)) of the second predetermined result (Replay GR (4)) is allowed to generate the special prize (special role). It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the predetermined result from which the first display result can be derived in the initial gaming state is determined solely, the operation procedure selected by the player and the derivation procedure corresponding to the type of the predetermined result If there is no match, no winning will occur. However, if a special winning is allowed at the same time as the predetermined result from which the first display result can be derived in the initial gaming state, a plurality of types of predetermined results will be displayed. The first display result is derived regardless of which of the corresponding derivation procedures is performed. Therefore, when the first display result is derived in the initial gaming state, a special prize may occur relatively. At the same time, the possibility of being allowed is increased, and when the first prize is generated in the initial gaming state, it is possible to effectively enhance the expectation that it has been determined that the special prize will be allowed to occur.

It is a front view of the slot machine of the Example to which this invention was applied. It is an internal structure figure of a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of a reel. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a slot machine. It is the schematic which shows the wiring connection state of the game control board and the electronic component for games connected to this game control board. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of an external output board | substrate. (A) is a timing chart showing the output status of the medal IN signal, and (b) is a timing chart showing the output status of the medal OUT signal. It is a figure which shows the structure of a reel motor. (A) is a timing chart which shows the control method at the time of starting of a reel motor, (b) is a timing chart which shows the control method at the time of rotation of a reel motor and a stop. It is a timing chart which shows the control situation of a full tank error. It is a timing chart which shows the control situation of a full tank error. It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the control situation of a full tank error. It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the control situation of a full tank error. It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the control situation of a full tank error. It is a figure which shows the structure of the combination defined as winning. It is a figure which shows the object combination of the internal lottery classified by game state. It is a figure which shows the combination of the re-game player who comprises replay GR. It is a figure which shows the re-game player which aligns to a pay line according to the operation procedure at the time of replay GR winning. (A) is a figure which shows the winning probability of the combination of the combination which contains a cherry and a cherry + 1 piece, or a combination of the combination of the combination of a combination of a cherry or cherry and a combination of a combination of a combination of a combination of a combination of cherry and cherry FIG. It is a figure which shows the transition state of a game state. It is a figure which shows the lottery opportunity of SCZ lottery. It is a figure which shows the winning probability of SCZ lottery classified by BB mode. It is a figure which shows the selection rate of the SCZ suggestion effect in BB mode A. It is a figure which shows the selection rate of the SCZ alerting | reporting effect in BB mode B. It is a figure which shows the selection rate of the roulette effect in BB mode C. It is a figure which shows the transition condition of a battle production. It is a figure which shows the transition condition of a battle production. It is a figure which shows the transition condition of a battle production. It is a figure which shows the transition condition of a battle production. It is a figure which shows the transition condition of a battle production. It is a figure which shows the transition condition of a battle production. It is a figure which shows the selection rate of a battle effect. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing signals input / output between the slot machine and the test apparatus. 4 is a timing chart showing signal input / output states between the slot machine and the test apparatus. It is a timing chart which shows the output condition of a stop execution position signal, a stop reel designation | designated signal, and a stop strobe signal.

  Examples of the present invention will be described below.

  An embodiment of a slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to the drawings. A slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a housing 1a having an open front surface, and a pivotable pivot at a side end of the housing 1a. The front door 1b is supported.

  Inside the casing 1a of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, reels 2L, 2C and 2R (hereinafter referred to as a left reel, a middle reel and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery. 1) are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction, and as shown in FIG. 1, a see-through window 3 in which three consecutive symbols among the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are provided on the front door 1b. It is arranged so that it can be seen from.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the outer periphery of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, “black 7”, “net 7 (shaded 7 in the figure)”, “white 7”, “BAR”, “replay”, A plurality of identifiable symbols such as “black watermelon”, “white watermelon”, “cherry”, “bell”, and “orange” are drawn in a predetermined order. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three stages in the see-through window 3, respectively.

  The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are provided in correspondence with each other and rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIG. 4), so that the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are continuously formed in the see-through window 3. In addition to being displayed while changing, by stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3 as display results.

  Inside the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R that detect a reference position for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and a reel LED 55 that irradiates the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R from the back side. , Is provided. The reel LED 55 includes nine LEDs corresponding to three consecutive symbols on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and each symbol can be irradiated independently.

  A display area 51a of a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1) is disposed at a position on the front side (player side) of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R of the front door 1b. The liquid crystal display 51 has a normally white liquid crystal panel having transparency in a state where no voltage is applied to the liquid crystal element, and a transmissive region 51b corresponding to the see-through window 3 of the display region 51a. The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be visually recognized from the player side through the see-through window 3. Further, a backlight (not shown) for irradiating the display area 51a from behind is provided on the back surface of the display area 51a excluding the transmissive area 51b, and the back surface further has a concealing member for concealing the inside. (Not shown) is provided.

  On the front side (front side in FIG. 1) of the liquid crystal display 51, an instruction (for example, touch operation) from the player to the display surface is detected, and the position (for example, the position where the touch operation is performed) is specified. Light-emitting devices 56a and 56b and light-receiving devices 57a and 57b that constitute a touch panel for the above-described purpose are installed. The light emitting devices 56a and 56b include a plurality of infrared light emitting elements (for example, LEDs). The light receiving devices 57a and 57b include a plurality of infrared light receiving elements (for example, phototransistors).

  The light emitting device 56a and the light receiving device 57a are installed in pairs in the horizontal direction across the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51. The light emitting device 56a and the light receiving device 57a are installed so that infrared rays radiated from the plurality of light emitting elements provided in the light emitting device 56a can be received by the plurality of light receiving elements provided in the light receiving device 57a. Similarly, the light emitting device 56b and the light receiving device 57b are installed in pairs in the vertical direction across the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51. The light emitting device 56b and the light receiving device 57b are installed so that infrared rays emitted from the plurality of light emitting elements provided in the light emitting device 56b can be received by the plurality of light receiving elements provided in the light receiving device 57b.

  In the present embodiment, infrared grids are formed along the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51 by emitting infrared rays from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b. When a touch operation is performed on the display surface by the player, the light receiving devices 57a and 57b detect the shielding of infrared rays and output a signal for specifying the position where the detected light receiving element is arranged. To the touch panel controller 99 described later. The touch panel controller 99 can specify the position where the touch operation is performed on the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51 based on signals from the light receiving devices 57a and 57b, and the touch panel is formed by these. Yes.

  The light emitting devices 56 a and 56 b constituting the touch panel are installed on the left side and the lower side of the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51, and the light receiving devices 57 a and 57 b are installed on the right side and the upper side of the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51. The touch panel can detect a touch operation in an area surrounded by the light emitting devices 56a and 56b and the light receiving devices 57a and 57b, and can specify a position where the touch operation is performed.

  On the front door 1b, a medal insertion unit 4 into which medals can be inserted, a medal payout exit 9 from which medals are paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a game value owned by the player) are used for one medal. A single bet switch 5 that is operated when setting the bet number, and using a credit, the maximum bet number (a game in this embodiment) among a specified number of bets determined in accordance with the game state within the range. Regardless of the state, the MAXBET switch 6 operated when setting 3), the medal stored as credit and the medal used for setting the bet amount are settled (the medal used for setting the credit and bet number) Is operated when stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R, but are provided operable by the player.

  The front door 1b also displays a credit indicator 11 that displays the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals acquired in BB, which will be described later, and an error code that indicates the contents when an error occurs. An auxiliary indicator 12 and a payout indicator 13 for displaying the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a prize are provided.

  Further, on the front door 1b, a 1BETLED 14 that notifies that the bet number is set to 1 by lighting, a 2BETLED 15 that notifies that the bet number is set to 2, and 3 bets are set. 3BET LED 16 to notify when lit, insertion request LED 17 to notify that a medal can be inserted is lit, start valid LED 18 to notify that the game start operation by the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, wait (previous Waiting state LED 19 for informing that it is in the state of waiting for the start of reel rotation since a certain period of time has not elapsed since the start of the game, during replay informing that it is in the replay game described later An LED 20 is provided.

  Inside the MAXBET switch 6, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 4) for notifying that the setting operation of the betting number by operating the one-sheet BET switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is effective. Inside the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R for informing that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is effective by lighting (FIG. 4).

  Inside the front door 1b, there is a reset switch 23 for detecting a reset operation for releasing an error state described later and a stop state described later by a predetermined key operation, while changing a set value and confirming a set value described later. A set value display 24 for displaying the set value at that time, and a flow path of medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 on the side of a hopper tank 34a (see FIG. 2) described later provided in the housing 1a or A medal selector having a insertion medal sensor 31 for detecting a medal that is inserted from the flow path switching solenoid 30 and the medal insertion unit 4 and selectively flows to the hopper tank 34a side to selectively switch to one of the medal payout exits 9 side. The door opening detection switch 25 (refer FIG. 4) which detects the open state of the front door 1b is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a reel sensor 33L that can detect the reel reference positions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, as shown in FIG. , 33C, 33R (see FIG. 4), an external output board 1000 for outputting an external output signal, a hopper tank 34a for storing medals inserted from the medal insertion section 4, and a hopper tank 34a. A hopper unit 34 including a hopper motor 34b for paying out medals from the medal payout opening 9, a payout sensor 34c for detecting medals paid out by driving the hopper motor 34b, and a power supply box 100 are provided.

  On the side of the hopper unit 34, an overflow tank 35 is provided for storing medals overflowing from the hopper tank 34a. Inside the overflow tank 35, a full sensor 35 a made up of a pair of electrically conductive members spaced apart from each other and provided at a height capable of detecting a predetermined amount of stored medals is provided. It is possible to detect that the medal storage amount stored in the inside when it is conductive by contacting through the medal stored in the inside exceeds a predetermined amount, that is, that the overflow tank is full. It has become.

  On the front surface of the power supply box 100 is a stop switch for selecting whether to enable / disable a stop function for controlling the stop state at the end of BB, which will be described later (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until a reset operation is performed). 36a, automatic checkout for selecting whether the automatic checkout function is effective / invalid for controlling automatic checkout processing (processing for adjusting (returning) medals stored as credits regardless of the player's operation) at the end of BB described later The switch 36b functions as a setting key switch 37 for switching to the setting change mode at the time of startup, and as a reset switch for canceling the error state and the stop state in the normal state. In the setting change mode, the winning probability of the internal lottery described later Reset / setting switch 38 that functions as a setting switch for changing the setting value of (development rate), power ON / OFF Power switch 39 is provided which is operated when that.

  When a game is played in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, first, medals are inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 or a bet number is set using credits. In order to use credits, the single BET switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 may be operated. When a predetermined number of bets determined according to the gaming state are set, the pay lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 1) become effective, and the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, that is, the game can be started. It becomes a state. In this embodiment, three cards are determined as the prescribed number of bets regardless of the gaming state. In addition, when a medal is inserted exceeding the maximum number out of the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit.

  The winning line is a line that is set to determine whether a combination of symbols displayed on the perspective windows 3 of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is a winning symbol combination. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the winning line L1 set across the symbols arranged in the middle of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R and the symbols arranged in the upper row of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R are straddled. The winning line L2, the winning line L3, the lower stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the upper stage of the reel 2R, that is, the upper side of the reel 2R. There are five types of winning lines L4 set across straddling symbols: the winning line L4, the upper reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, the lower reel 2R; It is defined as.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3.

  Then, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a combination) is placed on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L5. When the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped as a display result, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals are given to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit number (50 in this embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 1). If a combination of symbols with payout of medals is arranged on a plurality of activated pay lines, the total number of payouts determined for each combination of symbols aligned on the activated pay line is totaled. The total number of medals is awarded to the player. However, an upper limit (15 in this embodiment) is set for the number of medals to be awarded in one game, and when the total number of medals exceeds the upper limit, the upper limit number of medals is awarded. It will be. In addition, when a combination of symbols accompanying the transition of the gaming state is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L5, a game corresponding to the combination of symbols Transition to the state.

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 4, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 101. The game state is controlled by the game control board 40, and the game state is controlled by the effect control board 90. The production according to the control is controlled, and the power supply board 101 generates the drive power for the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 and supplies them to each part.

  The power supply board 101 is supplied with AC100V power from the outside, and from this AC100V power supply, a DC voltage necessary for driving electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated, and the game control board 40 and the game control board 40 are generated. It is supplied to the production control board 90 connected through the.

  Further, the above-described hopper motor 34b, payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, stop switch 36a, automatic checkout switch 36b, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38, and power switch 39 are connected to the power supply board 101. Yes.

  On the game control board 40, the one-sheet BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the settlement switch 10, the reset switch 23, the insertion medal sensor 31, the door opening detection switch 25, The reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R are connected, and the above-described payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, stop switch 36a, automatic settlement switch 36b, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38 are connected via the power supply board 101. Are connected, and the detection signals of these connected switches are inputted.

  Further, the game control board 40 includes the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, the payout display 13, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16, the insertion request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the waiting LED 19, the replaying LED 20, and the BET. The switch effective LED 21, left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R, the set value display 24, the flow path switching solenoid 30, and the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are connected to each other, and are described above via the power supply board 101. The hopper motor 34b is connected, and these electric components are driven based on control of a main control unit 41 (described later) mounted on the game control board 40.

  The game control board 40 includes a microcomputer having a main CPU 41a, ROM 41b, RAM 41c, and I / O port 41d. The main control unit 41 controls the game, and random numbers in a predetermined range (0 to 16383 in this embodiment). A random number generation circuit 42 that generates a random number, a sampling circuit 43 that acquires a random number from the random number generation circuit, and a switch detection circuit that detects a detection signal input from switches connected to the game control board 40 directly or via the power supply board 101 44, a motor drive circuit 45 that controls the drive of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, a solenoid drive circuit 46 that controls the drive of the flow path switching solenoid 30, and a drive control of various displays and LEDs connected to the game control board 40 LED drive circuit 47 for performing power supply, monitoring the power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 When detecting a voltage drop, the power interruption detection circuit 48 that outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the main control unit 41, the main CPU 41a when the power is turned on or when the initialization command from the main CPU 41a is not inputted A reset circuit 49 for giving a reset signal to the player, disconnection for monitoring an electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 and an electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 A monitoring IC 50 and other various devices and circuits are mounted.

  The main CPU 41a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timekeeping function and a timer interrupt, executes a program (described later) stored in the ROM 41b, and performs processing related to the progress of the game. Each part of the control circuit mounted on the game control board 40 is controlled directly or indirectly. The ROM 41b stores fixed data such as programs executed by the main CPU 41a and various tables. The RAM 41c is used as a work area when the main CPU 41a executes a program. The I / O port 41d inputs / outputs a control signal to / from each circuit connected via a signal input / output terminal included in the main control unit 41.

  Further, the main control unit 41 is supplied with backup power even during a power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 41c is held while the backup power is being supplied.

  The main CPU 41a executes basic processing that shifts in stages according to the detection state of various switches connected to the game control board 40. Further, the main CPU 41a has an interrupt function as described above, and can execute an interrupt process by interrupting the basic process when an interrupt occurs. In the present embodiment, the power interruption interrupt process is executed in response to the input of the voltage drop signal output from the power interruption detection circuit 48. Further, the main CPU 41a executes a timer interrupt process at regular time intervals (about 0.56 ms in this embodiment).

  The main CPU 41a transmits various commands to the effect control board 90 via the I / O port 41d. A command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is sent in only one direction, and no command is sent from the effect control board 90 to the game control board 40. The transmission line of the command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is composed of a strobe (INT) signal line, a data transmission line, and a ground line, and is connected via the effect relay board 80. The game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are not directly connected.

  The effect control board 90 is connected to the light receiving devices 57a and 57b constituting the touch panel described above, and detection signals of the connected light receiving devices 57a and 57b are input to the touch panel controller 99.

  Electrical components such as a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1), a rendering effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55 described above are connected to the rendering control board 90, which is disposed on the front door 1b of the slot machine 1. These electric components are driven based on control by a sub-control unit 91 (described later) mounted on the effect control board 90. The effect control board 90 is connected to the light emitting devices 56a and 56b constituting the touch panel described above, and the light emitting devices 56a and 56b are based on control by a touch panel controller 99 described later mounted on the effect control board 90. To be driven.

  Similar to the main control unit 41, the effect control board 90 includes a sub CPU 91a, ROM 91b, RAM 91c, and a microcomputer provided with an I / O port 91d. The sub control unit 91 controls the effect, and the effect control board 90. A display control circuit 92 that performs display control of the liquid crystal display 51 connected to the LED, an LED driving circuit 93 that performs drive control of the effect LED 52 and the reel LED 55, an audio output circuit 94 that controls audio output from the speakers 53 and 54, Supplied to a reset circuit 95 that gives a reset signal to the sub CPU 91a when the power is turned on or when an initialization command from the sub CPU 91a is not inputted for a certain period of time, a clock device 97 that outputs time information including date information and time information, and a slot machine 1 The power supply voltage is monitored, and when a voltage drop is detected, this is indicated Processing for identifying a position where a touch operation is performed on the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51 based on a signal from the power interruption detection circuit 98 that outputs a pressure drop signal to the sub-control unit 91 and the light receiving devices 57a and 57b. The sub CPU 91a receives commands sent from the game control board 40 and output information from the touch panel controller 99, and performs various controls for performing effects. And each part of the control circuit mounted on the effect control board 90 is controlled directly or indirectly.

  Similar to the main CPU 41a, the sub CPU 91a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function). The sub CPU 91a acquires a command from the main control unit 41 based on an input of a strobe (INT) signal output when the main control unit 41 transmits a command, and performs a command reception interrupt process for storing the command in the reception buffer. Run. In addition, the sub CPU 91a generates an interrupt at regular intervals and executes a timer interrupt process. Further, the sub CPU 91a executes a power interruption interrupt process according to the input of the voltage drop signal output from the power interruption detection circuit 98.

  The sub-control unit 91 is also supplied with backup power at the time of a power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 91c is held while the backup power is supplied.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, various boards such as the game control board 40 provided with the main control unit 41 for controlling the game are mounted, and these boards are shown in FIG. As described above, electronic components such as switches that can be operated by a player are connected via a cable.

  As described above, on the game control board 40, the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the insertion medal sensor 31, the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, and the reel sensor 33L. 33C, 33R, a hopper motor 34b, a payout sensor 34c, and an effect control board 90 are connected.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5, the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R, and the inserted medal sensor 31 are played via the operation unit relay board 110. The reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R and the reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R are connected to the game control board 40 via the reel relay board 120, and the hopper motor 34b and the payout sensor 34c are connected to the control board 40 by wiring. The game control board 40 is connected to the game via the power supply board 101, and the effect control board 90 is connected to the game control board 40 via the effect relay board 80.

  The operation unit relay board 110, the reel relay board 120, the power supply board 101, and the effect control board 90 are provided with wiring patterns (not shown) for connecting the game control board 40 and each electronic component. The detection signal output from the component to the game control board 40 or the power or signal supplied (input) from the game control board 40 can be relayed.

  In this way, various electronic components and the game control board 40 are connected to each other via the boards 110, 120, 101, and 80 attached to predetermined positions of the main body of the slot machine 1 (the casing 1a in this embodiment). This makes it easy to organize wiring from the game control board 40 to a plurality of electronic components individually arranged at predetermined locations on the main body of the slot machine 1 and allows the connector connection portion to be always connected to the relay board or the game control board 40. As a result, the connector connection portion of each electronic component is fixed, so that it is possible to prevent the connector connection portion from being searched for during the wire connection work or to make a mistake in the type of wiring to be connected.

  Single BET switch 5, MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, insertion medal sensor 31, reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R, hopper motor 34b, payout sensor 34c Is an electronic component that inputs and outputs signals related to the progress of the game to and from the game control board 40. The signal related to the progress of the game is, for example, an operation for setting the number of bets to make the game startable, an operation for starting the game, or an operation for deriving the display results of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Such as signals output to the game control board 40 in accordance with the progress of the game, detection of inserted medals, detection of the reference position of the reel, detection of the payout medals, etc. And a signal input to the game control board 40, a drive signal for driving the reels 2L, 2C, 2R according to the detection of the start operation, and a hopper for paying out medals when a winning occurs. A signal that is output from the game control board 40 in accordance with the progress of the game and that is input to the game electronic component.

  These gaming electronic components are a first electronic component that outputs a signal to the game control board 40 as the game progresses, and a second that receives a signal from the game control board 40 as the game progresses. And electronic components.

  The gaming electronic component and the board are connected via a cable, and the cable connecting the gaming electronic component and the board is designed to facilitate assembly work and wiring work at the time of manufacturing the slot machine. Separation is possible by releasing the connection. These gaming electronic components are basically electronic components that are continuously used in common with multiple models, and there are few opportunities to remove them from the main unit unless a failure occurs. It is fixed in place. On the other hand, the game control board 40, the effect control board 90, and the like need to be replaced when changing the model, and are removed from the main body at that time. That is, when removing the game control board 40, it is necessary to release the connection between the game electronic component and the effect control board 90, so the cable and the board that connect these boards and the board to the game electronic component are: The cable side connector provided at the end of the cable is electrically connected to the board side connector electrically connected to the wiring pattern of the board, and the cable side connector is removed from the board side connector. By releasing the connection, the game control board 40 can be easily removed from the main body and replaced.

  However, when the slot machine is shipped from the manufacturer to the game store in such a state that the wiring connection between the game control board 40 and the game electronic component can be easily released by removing the connector, for example, in a game store, the board side connector In this case, the cable-side connector can be easily removed from the board-side connector, and the cable-side connector connected to an unauthorized tool such as a so-called driving tool can be easily connected to the board-side connector.

  The driving instrument is, for example, operating various switches and the like provided in the slot machine by causing the game control board 40 to input / output a signal that is a pseudo reproduction of the signal input / output to / from the game control board 40 from the game electronic component. It is possible to automatically advance the game without playing. Therefore, for example, in a game store or the like, the regular connector connected to the board-side connector provided on the game control board 40 is removed, and an unauthorized connector connected to the driving tool is connected instead. By inputting / outputting signals to / from the game control board 40 at an appropriate timing to automatically advance the game, for example, it is possible to easily set a state where a special role is won. Therefore, the slot machine set in a state where the special role is won by using such an illegal driving tool, and RB and BB (BB (1) and BB (2)) described later are more advantageous. Slot machine set to a state where the possibility that BB is won is high (in this embodiment, it is highly likely that BB is won when “Cherry” stops at the middle stage of the right reel as will be described later. Therefore, it is possible to set a high probability that the BB is won.) For example, illegal sales such as providing to a player at the start of business of a game store was implemented. In this case, the fairness of the game may be impaired.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31, that is, the connection between the board side connector 620a of the game control board 40 and the cable side connector 610a of the cable 600a, the cable side of the cable 600a. Connection between the connector 611a and the board-side connector 621a of the operation unit relay board 110, and connection between the board-side connector 622q of the operation part relay board 110 and the cable-side connector 612q of the cable 601q, the connection between these connectors is released. It is controlled by the member.

  The connector restricting member is not removable unless the release restricting portion is destroyed. In order to release the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31, the release restricting portion must be destroyed. As a result, when even one connector connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 is released, the trace remains and it is extremely difficult to erase the trace. Unauthorized sales can be more effectively suppressed.

  In this embodiment, there is only one relay board between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31. However, when a plurality of relay boards are used, all the connector connections existing between them are disconnected. It is preferable to restrict the removal, and in this way, it becomes difficult to release the connection of any connector between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31, so that the illegal business is more effective. Can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, the first electronic components 5, 6, 7, 8L, 8C, 8R, 31, 33L, 33C, 33R, and 34c that input signals to the game control board 40 as the game progresses. Of the second electronic components 32L, 32C, 32R, and 34b for which signals are output from the game control board 40 as the game progresses, only connector connection between the inserted medal sensor 31 and the game control board 40 is restricted. A member is provided to restrict the connection between the connectors. That is, the inserted medal sensor 31 which cannot advance the game without the signal (the bet number cannot be set and the game cannot be started unless the signal from the inserted medal sensor 31 is input) and the game control. The connector restricting member is provided only for the connector connection with the board 40 to restrict the release of the connection between the connectors, and the connection between the connectors is released between the other electronic components and the game control board 40 to drive the instrument. Even if it is replaced with a connector, it will not be possible to automatically advance the game substantially, so it is possible to prevent fraudulent activities with minimal restrictions, and parts for disconnecting these connectors The score can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, only the connector connection between the inserted medal sensor 31 and the game control board 40 is provided with a connector restricting member to restrict the connection between the connectors, but the start switch 7 and the game control board 40 are not connected. The same effect can be obtained even if a connector restricting member is provided only for connector connection between the connector and the release of the connection between the connectors is restricted. Further, if the reel is not configured to stop until the reel stop operation is performed after the start of the reel rotation as in the present embodiment, between the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R and the game control board 40. The same effect can be obtained even if the connector restricting member is provided only for the connector connection to restrict the release of the connection between the connectors.

  In this embodiment, the door opening detection switch 25 is connected to the game control board 40 via a cable. However, any of the connectors of the cable provided between the door opening detection switch 25 and the game control board 40 may be used. When the connection at that connector is released, when the front door 1b is opened, the main control unit 41 mounted on the game control board cannot detect that fact, and the door opening notification or door opening is detected. Since the signal is not output, the discovery may be delayed even if the front door 1b is opened and an illegal act is performed.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25, that is, the connection between the board side connector 620a of the game control board 40 and the cable side connector 610a of the cable 600a, the cable of the cable 600a. For the connection between the side connector 611a and the board side connector 621a of the operation unit relay board 110, and the connection between the board side connector 622q of the operation part relay board 110 and the cable side connector 612q of the cable 601q, the connection between these connectors is released. It is regulated by a connector regulating member.

  This makes it difficult to release the connection between any of the connectors between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25, so that the front door 1b is not notified that the front door 1b has been opened. It is possible to effectively prevent the door 1b from being opened.

  Further, as described above, the connector restricting member is not removable unless the release restricting portion is destroyed, and in order to release the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25, the release restricting member When the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25 is released, the trace remains and the trace is extremely deleted. Since it is difficult, it can suppress more effectively that front door 1b will be opened in the state where the information that front door 1b was opened is not performed.

  In this embodiment, there is only one relay board between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25. However, when a plurality of relay boards are used, all the connector connections existing between them are connected. It is preferable to restrict the removal, and in this way, it becomes difficult to release the connection of any connector between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25, so the front door 1b is opened. It is possible to more effectively prevent the front door 1b from being opened in a state in which the notification of being made is not made.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of signal lines for connecting the main control unit 41 and a plurality of electronic components for inputting / outputting signals necessary for the progress of the game and the door opening detection switch 25 are connected to the game control board 40. Since it is connected to the operation unit relay board 110 with a single cable 600a, the connector connection between the board side connector 620a and the cable side connector 610a of the game control board 40, that is, the connection of only one connector is released. By restricting, it becomes possible to restrict the release of the connection between the plurality of signal lines, and it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of parts for restricting the release of the connector connection, and the number of these parts can be reduced.

  When a plurality of signal lines for connecting the main control unit 41 and a plurality of electronic components for inputting / outputting signals necessary for the progress of the game and the door opening detection switch 25 are connected via a plurality of cables. However, in order to regulate the release of these connector connections by arranging the board side connectors close to each other and restricting the release of the connection between the plurality of board side connectors and the plurality of cable side connectors with one component. It is not necessary to prepare a plurality of parts, and the number of these parts can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, the game control board 40 is attached to the main body of the slot machine in a state accommodated in the board case, and the upper case sealing piece and the lower case sealing piece constituting the board case are fixed, If the sealing piece is not destroyed, the board case is opened, and access to the stored game control board 40 is disabled, making it difficult to cheat the game control board 40. However, since the sealing piece is exposed to the outside as it is, it is relatively easy to break the sealing piece and open the substrate case, and the sealing piece is broken and accommodated in the substrate case. There is a possibility that the game control board 40 may be cheated, and countermeasures against these cheating are still insufficient.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, a covering member that covers the sealing piece of the substrate case is attached. As a result, the sealing piece of the substrate case is covered with the covering member, and it becomes impossible to directly access the sealing piece. If the covering member is not removed, the sealing piece cannot be destroyed. It would be very difficult to destroy and open the upper case and the lower case to take out the game control board 40, so that illegal actions such as replacing the game control board 40 with an illegal board are effective. Can be prevented.

  The slot machine 1 of this embodiment outputs an external output signal indicating a gaming state, an error occurrence state, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 6, these external output signals are output from the game control board 40 under the control of the main CPU 41a, and the information output terminal board 1010 of the game store (hall) in which the external output board 1000 and the slot machine 1 are installed. Via a hall computer such as a hall computer.

  From the game control board 40 to the external output board 1000, a medal IN signal indicating the number of medals used for setting the number of bets, a medal OUT signal indicating the number of medals given to the player due to the occurrence of a winning, a gaming state RB signal indicating that RB is described later, a BB signal indicating that the gaming state is BB described later, a door opening signal indicating that the front door 1b is open, and a setting change mode described later. A setting change signal indicating that the medals are in error, an insertion error signal indicating an abnormality in the medal selector, and a payout error signal indicating an abnormality in the hopper unit 34 are output.

  In this embodiment, there is no challenge time (a gaming state where the number of sliding pieces on the reel is limited, but winning is allowed for all small roles) and a challenge bonus with a high probability of challenge time. However, in order to make common with the slot machines equipped with these gaming states, in addition to the signal lines for outputting the above signals, the gaming state is a challenge between the gaming control board 40 and the external output board 1000. A signal line for outputting a CT signal indicating that the time is in progress and a CB signal indicating that the gaming state is in the challenge bonus is connected, and a signal line for error output that may be expanded in the future is connected. Has been.

  The external output board 1000 is provided with a relay circuit 1001, a parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002, a terminal for each output signal, and a connector 1003 to be electrically connected to the circuit of the information providing terminal board 1010. ing.

  Of the signals output from the game control board 40, the medal IN signal, medal OUT signal, RB signal, BB signal, (CT signal, CB signal) are directly used as pulse signals via the relay circuit 1001. The information is output to the information providing terminal board 1010.

  On the other hand, a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, a payout error signal, and a (preliminary signal) are security signals that are serial signals that can be individually identified by the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002. And output to the information providing terminal board 1010.

  The medal IN signal, medal OUT signal, RB signal, BB signal, (CT signal, CB signal) output from the external output board 1000 are output to the hall device via the information providing terminal board 1010. . On the other hand, the security signal output from the external output board 1000 is again converted into a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, a payout error signal, and a spare signal at the information providing terminal board 1010 and output to the hall device. Will be.

  The external output signal includes a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, and a dispensing error signal, but these door opening signal, setting changing signal, closing error signal, and dispensing error signal are not frequently output signals. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide an external output terminal for each of these signals.

  For this reason, in this embodiment, the external output signal output from the game control board 40 as described above is output to the hall device via the external output board 1000, and the door opening signal and setting among these external output signals are set. The change signal, input error signal, and payout error signal are converted into security signals, which are serial signals that can be individually identified, by the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002 mounted on the external output board 1000, and output to the outside. Thus, it is possible to output the door opening signal, the setting change signal, the closing error signal, and the dispensing error signal from one terminal, and it is not necessary to provide more terminals than necessary.

  In addition, even if there is a spare signal line that is not currently used but may be used in the future, individual signals can be identified with a single terminal, including the signal output from the spare signal line. It is possible to output as much as possible, and a spare signal line terminal that is not used does not become an empty terminal.

  In this embodiment, the door opening signal, the setting change signal, the making error signal, and the paying error signal are serially identifiable by the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002 mounted on the external output board 1000. It is converted to a security signal, which is a signal, and output to the outside. For example, any one of a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, and a paying error signal is output by an AND circuit or the like. In such a case, an error signal may be output to the outside through a single terminal. Even in this case, either an error has occurred in the external device, the door is open, or the setting is being changed. Therefore, it is possible to specify that the terminal is being generated, and it is not necessary to provide more terminals than necessary. In this case, since a plurality of signals can be output to the outside with one terminal without being converted into a serial signal, the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a uses a medal IN signal indicating the number of medals (credits) used to set the wager number as an external output signal as described above in order to manage sales with a hall computer. Control is performed to output a medal OUT signal indicating the number of medals (credits) given to the player as a result of winning to an external device as an external output signal.

  As an output method of the medal IN signal, a method of outputting every time the bet number is set can be considered. In this method, when the bet number is canceled after the bet number is set, the medal IN signal is output. There is a problem that it is necessary to perform control to cancel the output. In addition, when it is possible to set the bet number using both medals and credits, the bet number is set using a program that outputs a medal IN signal when the medals are inserted and the bet number is set and the credits. It is necessary to separately provide a program for outputting the medal IN signal when set.

  For this reason, as shown in FIG. 7A, the main CPU 41a of the present embodiment, when the operation of the start switch 7 is effectively detected, that is, when the number of bets used in the game is determined, The medal IN signals for the set number of bets are collectively output.

  Specifically, when a predetermined number of bets has not yet been set and the insertion of a medal is detected in a state where the insertion of a medal is permitted, every time one insertion of the medal is detected by the insertion medal sensor 31. One bet is added. When the specified number of bets is set, the operation of the start switch 7 is validated. Thereafter, when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected, that is, when the bet number used in the game is determined, the main CPU 41a collectively outputs the medal IN signals for the set bet number. In addition, when the bet amount is set by using credit for all or a part of the specified number of bets, the main CPU 41a is set when the specified number of bets is set and the operation of the start switch 7 is detected. The medals IN signals for the number of bets set to are collectively output.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the game is started, that is, when the number of medals used for setting the number of bets is determined, the medal IN signal indicating the number of medals used for setting the number of bets is collectively collected from the outside. It is possible to omit the control for canceling the outputted medal IN signal in accordance with the cancellation of the bet number, and the control related to the output of the medal IN signal can be simplified.

  In addition, since the medal IN signal indicating the number of medals used for setting the bet number is collectively output when the number of medals used for setting the bet number is determined, the bet number is set by inserting the medals. Sometimes it is not necessary to separately provide a program that outputs a medal IN signal and a program that outputs a medal IN signal when the number of bets is set using credits, and a program that outputs a medal IN signal is shared. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the program capacity for outputting the medal IN signal.

  On the other hand, as an output method of the medal OUT signal, a method of outputting the medal OUT signals collectively according to the number of medals paid out at the start of medal payout or a method of outputting the medal OUT signals collectively at the end of the medal payout can be considered. In the former case, when a medal out error occurs while the medal is being paid out and the medal payout is interrupted, the number of medals indicated by the medal OUT signal and the number of medals actually paid out are changed. There is a problem that an error occurs and the external device cannot specify the exact payout number at that time. In the latter case, after the medal payout is completed, the next game cannot be started until the output of the medal OUT signal is completed.

  Therefore, the main CPU 41a of the present embodiment shows that when a medal is paid out by paying out a physical medal from the hopper unit 34, a medal OUT indicating that one medal is awarded every time a medal is paid out. Output a signal.

  More specifically, when a winning with a medal payout occurs and is added to the credit, each time 1 is added to the credit, the main CPU 41a outputs a 1-pulse medal OUT signal indicating the payout of one medal. When a medal is paid out from the hopper unit 34, as shown in FIG. 7B, one medal is paid out and the main CPU 41a indicates the payout of one medal every time it is detected by the payout sensor 34c. A 1-pulse medal OUT signal is output. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 7B, during the medal payout, it is determined that a predetermined payout medal-free time has elapsed since the last medal payout was detected, or the medals are continuous. If the detection time exceeds a predetermined medal clogging time and is determined to be a medal clogging, and if the payout operation is stopped due to a payout error state, the number of sheets actually paid out is stopped before the payout operation is stopped. Only the medal OUT signal is output, the payout error is canceled, the remaining payout is resumed, the remaining medal is paid out, and the medal OUT signal accompanying the payout of the remaining medals is output each time it is detected by the payout sensor 34c. Will be. Then, when the payout of the last medal is detected and the output of the medal OUT signal is completed, the control of one game is finished, and the insertion of the medal is permitted at this time.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when a medal is paid out by paying out a physical medal from the hopper unit 34, a medal OUT signal indicating that one medal is awarded every time one medal is paid out. Even if the medal is out and the payout error occurs and the payout of the medal is interrupted, the number of medals indicated by the medal OUT signal and the actual payout Since the number of medals coined out matches, the number of medals paid out can be accurately output to the outside.

  Also, in the method of outputting medals OUT signals collectively according to the number of medals paid out at the start of medal payout or the method of outputting medals OUT signals collectively at the end of medal payout, more medals are forced than the number of medals that are originally paid out. Medal indicating that one medal was awarded each time a medal is paid out, although it is difficult to detect it with an external device such as a hall computer when an illegal act of automatically paying out is performed. By outputting a signal, it is possible to accurately and accurately grasp the number of medals paid out by winning a small role on an external device in real time. It becomes possible to detect and such an illegal act can be prevented effectively.

  In addition, every time a medal is paid out, a medal OUT signal indicating that one medal has been awarded is output. Therefore, the bet number setting operation is permitted immediately after the medal payout is completed. Therefore, since the next game can be started, the game can proceed smoothly.

  FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. The reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are, for example, hybrid type stepping motors, and include a stator 32b and a rotor 32a facing the stator 32b. The rotor 32a has a large number of gear-shaped salient poles (not shown), and permanent magnets magnetized in the same direction as the rotation shaft are incorporated therein. The reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R receive a pulse signal output from the motor drive circuit 45 based on the control of the main CPU 41a, and the respective excitation phases φ1 to φ4 of the stator 32b are excited according to a predetermined procedure. Each time a pulse is received, the rotor 32a is rotated by a predetermined angle (one step).

  FIG. 9A is a timing chart showing a control method when starting the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R. In the figure, φ1 to φ4 indicate each excitation phase, “ON” indicates an excitation state, and “OFF” indicates a demagnetization state. When starting the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, the main CPU 41a starts excitation in the rotational direction by a 1-2 phase excitation method, which will be described later, starting from the state where only the stop phase is excited. Specifically, for example, when the stop phase is (φ3), φ1 to φ4 are changed in the order of (φ3, φ4), (φ4), (φ4, φ1). Excited alternately in 2 phase, 1 phase and 2 phase.

  If the excitation is started with a phase different from the stop phase as a starting point, the permanent magnet of the rotor 32a is suddenly attracted to the excitation phase, and the reel vibrates at the start of rotation. In the present embodiment, since the excitation is started from the stop phase as a starting point, the reel integrally coupled with the rotor 32a starts smoothly.

  FIG. 9B is a timing chart showing a control method during rotation and stop of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R.

  First, during the rotation, that is, until the condition for stopping the reels is satisfied, the reel motors are driven by the 1-2 phase excitation method to rotate the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. For example, a pulse signal indicating that φ1 to φ4 is excited is turned ON / OFF at the timing shown in FIG. 9B, and (φ4, φ1), (φ1), (φ1,. (φ2), (φ2), (φ2, φ3), (φ3), (φ3, φ4), (φ4), (φ4, φ1)... in this order, 2 phase, 1 phase, 2 phase, 1 phase, 2 The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated by exciting the φ1 to φ4 alternately for each phase and rotating the rotor 32a.

  Next, when the condition for stopping the rotating reel is satisfied, that is, when the rotor 32a steps out by an overshoot amount described later, an angle at which the symbol (target symbol) selected by the stop operation can be derived and displayed. When the angle position reaches the position (target stop angle position), the process shifts to the reel stop control from the excited state of the two phases. For example, when the condition for stopping the reel is established in the period shown in FIG. 9B as the stop condition establishment step, the process proceeds to stop control after waiting until time Ta when the two phases are excited. .

  The reel stop control is performed in two stages as indicated by T1 and T2 in FIG. The control performed at T1 is called 2-phase excitation stop control, and the control performed at T2 is called 3-phase excitation stop control.

  The two-phase excitation stop control is started from the time Ta when the reel motor is driven by the 1-2 phase excitation method and the state is shifted from the state in which the one phase is excited to the state in which the two phases are excited. In this control, the excited state is held for a predetermined hold time T1. For example, as shown in FIG. 9B, the state in which (φ1, φ2) is excited is held for the hold time T1 from the time when (φ1, φ2) is excited to the state in which (φ1) is excited. To do. As a result, rapid braking is applied to the rotor 32a of each reel motor that has been rotating at a high speed.

  The hold time T1 is determined according to the amount of overshoot that will cause the step-out, and varies depending on the magnitude of the holding torque of the reel motor, the inertia of the rotor 32a, the spring constant, and the like. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the amount of overshoot is four steps of the stepping motor, and the hold time T1 is set as a time required for the reel motor to drive for three steps. Then, the target stop angle position of the rotor 32a is set three steps ahead from the stage where the two-phase excitation stop control is started in accordance with the hold time T1.

  For this reason, at the time Tb when the hold time T1 elapses, the rotor 32a is in a position immediately before the target stop angle position, and the rotation speed is braked. Therefore, the three-phase excitation stop control is started by switching the excitation pattern at time Tb. That is, φ1 is demagnetized, and the stop phase φ3 corresponding to the target stop angle position and the two brake phases φ2 and φ4 at opposite positions across the stop phase are excited for a predetermined time T2. Thereby, the rotor 32a stops at the holding torque stable point of the stop phase φ3, that is, the target stop angle position while obtaining the brakes by the brake phases φ2 and φ4. As a result, the reel integrally coupled with the rotor 32a stops at a target stop position where the target symbol can be derived and displayed without being vibrated accurately.

  After the three-phase excitation stop control is executed during T2 (Tc), the brake phases φ2 and φ4 are demagnetized, and the motor voltage is changed from H to L while maintaining the excitation state of the stop phase φ3. The reason why the excited state of the stop phase φ3 is maintained even after the rotor 32a is stopped is that the rotor 32a deviates from the holding torque stable point of the stop phase φ3 due to the phase difference between the holding torque and the detent torque or the deviation due to the effect of friction. It is for preventing. As a result, it is possible to prevent the reel from moving finely after being temporarily stopped and the angular position of the rotor 32a when the reel motor is started next time from being shifted from the angular position at the time of stopping.

  The excitation state of the stop phase φ3 that is maintained even after the rotor 32a is stopped is a predetermined time (30 seconds in this embodiment) without performing the next game start operation, and shifts to a standby state (demonstration effect). Is released (Td). That is, after the rotor 32a is stopped, when a predetermined time has passed without the start operation of the next game being performed, all of φ1 to φ4 are demagnetized. For this reason, for example, there is no burden on the components and the like constituting the stepping motor due to the heat generated when the excitation phase is continuously excited for a long time, so that deterioration of these components can be prevented. Further, in this embodiment, the excited state is released at the timing when the state in which the next game start operation is not performed continues for a predetermined time and shifts to the standby state (demonstration effect), so that while the player is playing Can maintain a state in which the symbols arranged on the reels are not easily displaced, while it is possible to reduce the load on the components of the stepping motor in a state where the possibility that the player is playing is low.

  As described above, in order to start the rotation of the reel smoothly, it is necessary to specify the exact stop position of the rotor 32a at the start of the rotation of the reel motor. In this embodiment, the two-phase excitation stop control and the three-phase excitation control are performed. By performing the stop control of the reel motor in combination with the excitation stop control, the rotation of the rotor 32a is rapidly braked by the two-phase excitation stop control and is guided to the target stop angle position, and thereafter by the three-phase excitation stop control. Since the rotor 32a stops at the target stop angle position by excitation of the stop phase while obtaining the brake by excitation of the two brake phases at opposite positions across the stop phase of the target stop angle position, the rotor 32a is rotating. The rotor 32a can be stopped at the target stop angle position without vibrating. Furthermore, since the rotor 32a stops at the target stop angle position, the exact stop position of the rotor 32a is specified, so that the reel can be smoothly rotated at the start of rotation.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the medal payout rate changes according to the set value. Specifically, the medal payout rate is changed by using a winning probability corresponding to a set value in an internal lottery described later. The set value is composed of 6 levels of 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate, and the payout rate being lower in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. In other words, when 6 is set as the set value, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantages decrease stepwise in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.

  In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 1 after the setting key switch 37 is turned on. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 37 in the ON state, 1 is displayed as the initial value of the setting value on the setting value display 24, and the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38 is set. Transition. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change mode, the setting value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated one by one (when further operation is performed from the setting 6, the setting value is returned to the setting 1). . When the start switch 7 is operated, the set value is confirmed, and the confirmed set value is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the state shifts to a state in which the game can proceed.

  Next, initialization of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 will be described. The storage area of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is divided into an important work, a general work, a special work, a set value work, a stop phase work, a non-saved work, an unused area, and a stack area.

  The important work is a work in which data that is inconvenient to be initialized at the end of the BB, such as various display devices and LED display data, input / output data of the I / O port 41d, and a game time clock counter, is stored. The general work is a work that stores data that can be initialized at the end of the BB, such as a stop control table, a stop symbol, the number of medals paid out, and the total number of medals paid out in the BB. The special work is a work that stores data to be initialized only before the start of setting, such as data for transmitting a command to the effect control board 90 and various software random numbers. The set value work is a work in which a set value used when performing a lottery in the internal lottery process is stored. After initializing 0 before setting is started (before shifting to the setting change mode), 1 is stored. The set value that is corrected and newly set at the end of the setting (when the setting change mode is ended) is stored. The stop phase work is a work in which data indicating the stop phase of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R is stored, and data indicating the stop phase is stored when the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are stopped. The Rukoto. The unsaved work is a work that holds the state of various switches, and a value is always set regardless of whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is destroyed at the time of activation. The unused area is an unused area in the storage area of the RAM 41c, and is initialized if any one of a plurality of initialization conditions described later is satisfied. The stack area is an area in which data saved from the register of the main CPU 41a is stored, and the unused stack area is established by any one of a plurality of initialization conditions to be described later, like the unused area. In this case, the used stack area is not initialized because the program continues.

  In this embodiment, the main CPU 41a operates when the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are both ON, when a RAM error occurs, when starting only when the setting key switch 37 is ON, BB At the end, when the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are both OFF, when the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed, the six initialization conditions at the end of one game are satisfied In addition, five types of initialization are performed in different regions to be initialized according to each initialization condition.

  Initialization 0 is performed when the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are both ON at the time of start-up, and initialization is performed before the transition to the setting change mode or when a RAM abnormality error occurs. In initialization 0, all areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) of the storage area of the RAM 41c other than the used stack area are initialized. Initialization 1 is an initialization performed only when the setting key switch 37 is in an ON state at the time of start-up and shifts to the setting change mode. In the initialization 1, in the storage area of the RAM 41c, All areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) other than the in-use stack area and the stop phase work are initialized. Initialization 2 is initialization performed at the end of the BB. In initialization 2, the general work, the unused area, and the unused stack area are initialized in the storage area of the RAM 41c. Initialization 3 is an initialization performed when both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are in an OFF state at the time of activation, and the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed. The stored work, unused area, and unused stack area are initialized. Initialization 4 is initialization performed at the end of one game. In initialization 4, an unused area and an unused stack area in the storage area of the RAM 41c are initialized.

  In this embodiment, initialization 0 and initialization 1 are performed before transition to the setting change mode. However, they may be performed at the end of the setting change mode, that is, after the setting is confirmed. In this case, if the set value work is initialized, the determined set value is lost. Therefore, the set value work is not initialized.

  As described above, in order to start the reel smoothly, it is necessary to specify the exact stop position of the rotor 32a at the start of the rotation of the reel motor. If the data in the RAM 41c including the data indicating the stop phase is initialized, it is impossible to specify the exact stop position of the rotor 32a after changing the setting. When the reel motor is first rotated, Since the permanent magnet of the rotor 32a is attracted to the excitation phase and the reel vibrates at the start of rotation, the rotation mode of the reel becomes unsightly and the player has forgotten that the setting has been changed. There is a problem of end.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, data indicating the stop phase when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are stopped (0, 1, 2, and 3 indicate φ1, φ2, φ3, and φ4, respectively) is allocated to the RAM 41c. By setting the stopped phase work, the exact stop position of the rotor 32a can be specified. When only the setting key switch 37 is in an ON state at the time of start-up, and when shifting to the setting change mode, the RAM 41c is initialized, but the stop phase work is not initialized. Even in this gaming state, data indicating the stop phase of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R stored in the stop phase work is maintained. For this reason, even when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are first rotated after the setting is changed, it is possible to specify the exact stop position of these rotors 32a. It becomes possible to start rotation smoothly. As a result, the reel does not vibrate when the reel is first rotated after the setting is changed, and it is possible to prevent the player from seeing that the setting has been changed.

  In addition, both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are in an ON state at the time of starting, and the RAM 41c including the stop phase work can be initialized when shifting to the setting change mode. Therefore, it is possible to select whether or not to initialize the stationary phase work according to the operation method when shifting to the setting change mode at the time of activation. As a result, it is possible to initialize the RAM 41c including the stop phase work, so that an illegal program or the like becomes resident by using the stop phase work assigned to store the excitation phase of the stepping motor. Can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, the RAM 41c is initialized when only the setting key switch 37 is activated and shifted to the setting change mode. At this time, by not initializing the stop phase work, By maintaining the data indicating the stop phase of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R stored in the stop phase work even in the gaming state after the setting change, the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are first rotated after the setting change. Even in this case, these stop phases can be specified, but even when the data in the RAM 41c is cleared as the set value is changed, a specific initial excitation phase is set as the stop phase work. The excitation phase indicated by the data set for the stop phase work is excited before the game can be started after the setting is changed. 32L, 32C, when rotating the 32R, may be able to identify these stop phases.

  Specifically, by clearing the data in the RAM 41c as the set value is changed, 0 indicating φ1 which is the initial excitation phase is set in the stop phase work. After the data indicating the initial excitation phase φ1 is set in the stop phase work, the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work, that is, the initial excitation phase φ1 is excited before the game can be started. . The data indicating the initial excitation phase is set in the stop phase work by clearing the stop phase work in the RAM 41c, but the data set in the stop phase work is changed to the data indicating the initial excitation phase. By updating, data indicating the initial excitation phase may be set in the stop phase work.

  As a result, even when the data in the RAM 41c is cleared as the setting value is changed, the permanent magnet of the rotor 32a is attracted to φ1 which is the initial excitation phase before the game can be started, and the angular position of the rotor 32a. And the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work can be matched, and then the data in which the angular position of the rotor 32a is set in the stop phase work when starting the reel motor in the first game is obtained. Since excitation is started in a state that coincides with the excitation phase shown, the reel integrally coupled with the rotor 32a can be started smoothly. Therefore, when the reel is rotated for the first time after the setting is changed, the reel does not vibrate, and it is possible to prevent the player from seeing that the setting has been changed.

  Also, when the main CPU 41a is started, even when returning to the state before the power interruption, the specific initial excitation phase is set as the stop phase work, and the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work is changed after the setting change, It is preferable to excite the game before the game can be started. As a result, for example, the correspondence between the angular position of the rotor 32a and the stop phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work by moving the reel manually. Even when the power cannot be removed, the permanent magnet of the rotor 32a is attracted to φ1, which is the initial excitation phase, when the power is turned on, and the angular position of the rotor 32a and the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work can be matched. Thereafter, when starting the reel motor in the first game, the angular position of the rotor 32a matches the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work. Since starting the excited by state, it is possible to smoothly start the reels are integrally coupled with the rotor 32a.

  In addition, the excitation state of the initial excitation phase is a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 30 seconds, without waiting for the game start operation) as in the stop phase excitation state maintained after the rotor 32a is stopped. It is preferable to be released when the state (the same timing as the transition to the demonstration effect) has elapsed, and in this way there will be no burden on the parts that make up the stepping motor. Deterioration can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, the main CPU 41a determines whether or not the overflow tank 35 is full based on the detection state of the full sensor 35a, and when it is determined that the full tank is full, a reset operation (reset switch 23 or reset) is performed. The operation is controlled to a full error state that disables the progress of the game until the / setting switch 38 is operated).

  In this embodiment, medals inserted from the outside are first stored in the hopper tank 34a, and the overflow medals are stored in the overflow tank 35 when the hopper tank 34a is full. Whether or not the full tank state of the tank 35 is detected by the full tank sensor 35a and the full tank state is determined. However, whether or not the overflow tank 35 is provided and the storage amount of the hopper tank 34a is equal to or greater than a certain amount. May be provided, and the full tank state of the hopper tank 34a may be detected by the full tank sensor to determine the full tank state. In addition, a first full sensor that detects whether or not the amount stored in the hopper tank 34a is equal to or greater than a certain amount is provided. When the first full sensor detects that the hopper tank 34a is full, the flow path of the inserted medal is set. In addition to switching to the overflow tank 35 side, a second full tank sensor for detecting the full tank state of the overflow tank 35 is provided, and the full tank state is determined based on detection of one or both of the first full sensor and the second full sensor. It may be determined. For example, even when the second full sensor detects the full state, the medal stored in the hopper tank 34a may be paid out and the first full sensor may not detect the full state. By switching the medal flow path again to the hopper tank 34a side, medals can be stored until both tanks are full. Further, in such a case, even if only the second full sensor detects the full state, it is not determined that the full state is reached, and both the first full sensor and the second full sensor are full. When it is determined that the full tank state is detected, it is possible to further reduce the frequency at which the full tank state is determined.

  The main CPU 41a monitors the output state of the detection signal output from the full sensor 35a in the switch input determination process performed every 2.24 ms in the timer interrupt process. In the switch input determination process, when input determination of other switches (start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, etc.) is performed, the state is switched from the off state to the on state, and continuously (for a certain period ( The number of times assigned for each switch type) On the condition that the switch is determined to be ON, the ON state of the switch is determined and the detection flag of the switch is set in the RAM 41c. For 35a, the on state of the full sensor 35a is determined only by switching from the off state to the on state, and the detection flag of the sensor is set in the RAM 41c. This is because the full sensor 35a is driven at a higher voltage than the other switches, and even if noise or the like occurs, there is little voltage fluctuation and erroneous detection is less likely to occur. In this way, in the switch input determination process, the on state of the full sensor 35a is determined only by the detection signal of the full sensor 35a changing from off to on, and the duration from when the full sensor 35a changes from off to on. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control related to the determination of the detection state of the full sensor 35a.

  The main CPU 41a determines whether or not it is in a full state based on the detection state of the full sensor 35a (the presence or absence of a detection flag) only once per game at the timing when the insertion of a medal is first detected after the end of the game control. If the full tank sensor 35a is on, the full tank flag is set and the full tank flag indicating the full tank state is set in the RAM 41c. However, in the next game in which the re-game player wins, the game ends. The medal is not allowed to be inserted until the medals are inserted, and the insertion of medals is not effectively detected. In the next game in which the re-game player wins, the determination of whether or not the tank is full is omitted. Even if the full sensor 35a is detected, it is not determined that the tank is full, and the full tank flag is not set. Further, the main CPU 41a detects the inserted medal sensor 31 even when the medal insertion is not permitted. However, even if the insertion of a medal is detected during the replay game, the main CPU 41a inserts a valid medal. In this case, the determination of whether or not the tank is full is omitted. Even when the medal can be inserted after the game control is finished, the main CPU 41a sets the bet amount using the credit, and even when the game starts without the medal being inserted, the medal is inserted. In such a case, the determination of whether or not the full tank state is reached is omitted, and even if the full tank sensor 35a is detected, the full tank state is not determined and the full tank flag is set. There is nothing.

  Further, the main CPU 41a determines whether or not the full tank flag is set at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted after the game control is finished, that is, whether or not the full tank state is determined. When the tongue flag is set, the progress of the game is disabled, and a full error state is controlled until a reset operation is performed. The main CPU 41a determines whether or not the replay game in-process flag is set in the RAM 41c before determining whether or not the full tank flag is set after the game control is finished, that is, whether or not the game is a replay game. If it is a replay game, the determination of whether or not the full tank flag is set is omitted. In such a case, even if the full tank flag is set, a full tank error state is set. Is not controlled, and if the replay game ends and is not a replay game, the full tank flag is determined at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted, and the full tank error state is controlled.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 10, when the insertion of a medal is detected for the first time after the end of the game control, it is determined whether or not the full tank sensor 35a is full based on the detection state of the full tank sensor 35a. If it is on, it is determined that the tank is full and a full tank flag is set in the RAM 41c. After that, if the re-game player has not won a prize in the game, after the control of the game is finished, the full-game error state is controlled at a timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted. On the other hand, when the re-gamer wins in the game and the replay game flag is set (not shown), the full game error state is not controlled after the game ends, and the next game (replay game) After the completion of, the full-error error state is controlled at a timing before the medal of the next game (or the next game if the next game is also a replay game) can be inserted. That is, in the game next to the game in which the re-game player wins, the full tank error state is not controlled.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11, in the game next to the game won by the re-gamer, the insertion of medals is not permitted and the insertion of medals is not detected effectively. Even if the full tank sensor 35a is detected in the state, it is not determined that the tank is full, and the full tank flag is not set. Then, after the control of the game is finished, when the re-player is not won in the game and the medal can be inserted, it is determined that the medal is inserted for the first time when the medal is detected, and the game is full. If the tongue flag is set in the RAM 41c and the re-game player has not won a prize in the game, it is controlled to a full tank error state at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted after the end of the control of the game.

  Although not particularly illustrated, even if the medal can be inserted after the game control is finished, if the bet number is set using credits and the game starts without the medal being inserted, No charging is detected, and even if the full sensor 35a is detected in such a state, it is not determined that the tank is full, and the full flag is not set. Then, after the control of the game is finished, the medal can be inserted, and when the insertion of the medal is first detected, it is determined that the tank is full, and the full flag is set in the RAM 41c. In other words, a game is played by setting the number of bets using credits, and if no medal is inserted during that time, a full tank error state is not determined until the next game where a medal is inserted. There is no control.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, after the game control is finished, the medal stored in the overflow tank 35 is detected only once per game at the timing when the insertion of the medal is first detected based on the detection state of the full tank sensor 35a. It is determined whether or not the amount of storage is full, and if it is determined that the tank is full, the game progress is disabled and controlled to a full tank error state until a reset operation is performed. For example, when a replay game or a credit is used, in a game in which medals are not inserted from the outside, monitoring whether or not the amount of stored medals stored in the overflow tank 35 is full, The amount of game media stored in the overflow tank 35 is full even though the medal storage amount does not increase. In addition to being unnecessarily monitored whether or not it has become unnecessary, it is controlled by a full-fill error more frequently than necessary, which causes annoyance to the player and increases the labor of the game hall clerk. There is a problem that it ends up.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the next replay game in which the re-game player has won a prize as described above, the insertion of medals is not permitted until the game ends, so that the insertion of medals is detected effectively. The determination of whether or not the tank is full is omitted, the determination of whether or not the tank is full is not wasted, and the full tank can be monitored efficiently. It can reduce the control load required to determine the tank status and reduce the frequency of full tank errors as much as possible, making the player feel bothersome and reducing the labor of the store clerk to eliminate the full tank status. Is possible.

  In addition, since the full tank state is determined when the insertion of a medal is detected, in a replay game in which the insertion of a medal is prohibited, the determination as to whether the medal is full is inevitably omitted. In performing the control for omitting the determination of whether or not the replay game is full in the replay game, it is not particularly necessary to determine whether or not the game is a replay game.

  In addition, after the game control is finished, whether or not a full error has occurred at the timing when the insertion of medals is first detected in a state where the medals of the next game can be inserted, that is, at the timing when medals stored in the overflow tank 35 increase. Since the determination is performed, the full tank state can be determined at an efficient timing.

  In addition, after the game control is finished, when the insertion of the second medal or the third medal is detected in a state where the medal of the next game can be inserted, the bet number is set using credits. In some cases, an insufficient amount of bets may be set by inserting medals. In such a case, the game is determined to be full in the game even though the storage amount of the overflow tank 35 has increased. In this embodiment, after the game control is completed, the full tank state is detected at the timing when the insertion of the medal is first detected in the state where the medal of the next game can be inserted. Therefore, in a game in which the storage amount of the overflow tank 35 increases, it becomes possible to reliably detect the full tank state.

  Further, in this embodiment, even if the medal can be inserted after the game control is finished, the bet amount is set using the credit, and the game is started when the medal is not inserted and the game is started. The determination of whether or not the state is in a state is omitted, and in a game in which no medal is inserted and the storage amount of the overflow tank 35 does not increase, the determination of whether or not the full tank error has occurred is useless. It is possible to monitor the full tank condition efficiently without reducing the control load for determining the full tank condition and to reduce the frequency of full tank errors as much as possible. It becomes possible to reduce the labor for the store clerk to solve the full tank state.

  In addition, since the full state is determined when the insertion of a medal is detected, the number of bets is set using credits, and it is inevitable when the game starts without a medal being inserted. The determination of whether or not the vehicle is full is omitted, and when the number of bets is set using credits and the game starts without a medal being inserted, it is determined whether or not the vehicle is full. In performing the control not to be performed, it is not particularly necessary to determine whether or not the credit is used.

  In this embodiment, after the game control is finished, it is determined whether or not the full tank flag is set at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted, and when the full tank flag is set, It is controlled to a full tank error state before the next game medal can be inserted. For this reason, for example, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated once in a state where the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotating by being controlled to a full tank error state from the start of the game to the end of the control of the game. The rotation state is stopped, and the full tank error state is controlled. Thereafter, when the full tank error state is canceled, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated again, or the hopper motor 34b is driven to perform the medal payout operation. It is not necessary to perform complicated control such as stopping the medal payout operation once in a state of being in a state, controlling to a full tank error state, and then restarting the medal payout operation when the full tank error state is canceled. That is, it is not necessary to perform control such as interrupting the game control once and then restarting the game control, and the control related to the progress of the game can be prevented from becoming complicated.

  In the present embodiment, after the game control is finished, it is determined whether or not the full tank flag is set at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted. It is determined whether or not the full tank flag is set. If the full tank flag is set, the full tank error state may be controlled at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted. Even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  In addition, even when the full tank state is determined after the game control is completed and the full tank flag is set, if the re-gamer has won a prize in the previous game and the next game is a replay game, the game is full. Since it is not controlled by the tan error state, the frequency of full tan errors can be further reduced, so that it is possible to make the player feel bothersome and reduce the labor for the store clerk to resolve the full tank state. It becomes.

  Further, in this embodiment, the determination as to whether or not the tank is full is made at the timing when the insertion of the medal is detected for the first time after the end of the game control. For example, after completion of the game control, it may be determined whether or not the next game medal can be filled up, or whether the game is started. A determination may be made as to whether or not the tank is full at the time of detection or when the game control ends.

  Here, a modified example of the control in the full tank error state will be described. In this modified example, the main CPU 41a determines whether or not it is in a full state based on the detection state of the full tank sensor 35a only once per game at the timing before the medal insertion of the next game is permitted after the game control is finished. However, the main CPU 41a determines whether or not the next game is a replay game based on the replay game flag before determining whether or not the tank is full, and determines that the game is a replay game. In the case, it is further determined whether or not the medal insertion flag is set, that is, whether or not a medal is inserted in the previous game, and only when it is determined that the medal insertion flag is set, the full tank state Whether or not is determined. For this reason, when the re-gamer wins in the previous game and no medals need to be inserted in the game (when the game is a replay game), or the bet number is set using credits in the previous game, When the game starts without being inserted, even if the full sensor 35a is detected, the determination as to whether or not it is full is omitted, and the full state is not determined.

  When the main CPU 41a determines that the game is full, the main CPU 41a disables the progress of the game at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted, and controls to the full error state until a reset operation is performed. To do. The main CPU 41a determines whether or not the next game is a replay game before determining whether or not the game is full after the game control is finished. In such a case, even if the full sensor 35a is detected, the full tank error state is not controlled. On the other hand, if it is not a replay game, it is determined whether or not medals have been inserted in the previous game, and if no medals have been inserted in the previous game, determination of whether or not the tank is full is omitted. In such a case, even if the full sensor 35a is detected, the full tank error state is not controlled, and if a medal is inserted in the previous game, the game control after the next game is over and the next It is determined whether or not the game medal of the game is full at a timing before the game can be inserted, and the full tank error state is controlled.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 12, it is determined whether or not the next game is a replay game at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted after the game control is finished, and the next game is a replay game. If not, it is further determined whether or not a medal has been inserted in the previous game, and if a medal has been inserted in the previous game, it is determined whether or not the full state is detected based on the detection state of the full tank sensor 35a. When it is determined that the full tank state is reached, the full tank error state is controlled at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 13, after the game control is finished, when the medal insertion flag is not set, that is, when the number of bets is set using credits in the previous game, and the game starts without inserting medals. In this state, it is not determined whether or not the full tank state is reached. Even if the full tank sensor 35a detects the full tank state in this state, it is controlled to the full tank error state after the game control of the game is finished. There is nothing. Then, after the control of the game in which medals are inserted after the next game (except for the replay game), it is determined that the state is full, and the full tank error state is controlled before the medal can be inserted.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 14, when the next game is a replay game after the game control is finished, that is, when a re-game player wins a prize in the previous game and it is not necessary to insert a medal in the game, It is not determined whether or not the vehicle is in the tan state, and even if the full tank sensor 35a detects the full tank state in such a state, the full tank error state is not controlled after the game control of the game is finished. Then, after the control of the game in which medals are inserted after the next game (except for the replay game), it is determined that the state is full, and the full tank error state is controlled before the medal can be inserted.

  In this modified example, as described above, after the game control is finished and before the medal of the next game can be inserted, it is only once per game based on the detection state of the full sensor 35a. If it is determined that the game is full, the game progress is disabled and controlled to a full tank error state until a reset operation is performed. Before, it is determined whether or not the next game is a replay game, and if it is a replay game, the determination of whether or not it is full is omitted. It is possible to monitor the full tank state efficiently, reduce the control load required to determine the full tank state, and reduce the frequency of full tank errors as much as possible. Or allowed to think, it is possible to reduce the effort for the clerk to eliminate the full state.

  Further, in the modification, when the bet number is set using credits and the game starts without inserting medals, the determination as to whether or not the game is full is omitted after the game control ends. In the case where no medal is inserted and the storage amount of the overflow tank 35 does not increase, the determination of whether or not a full tank error has occurred is not performed wastefully, and the full tank state can be efficiently obtained. The monitoring load can be reduced, and the control load required to determine the full tank status can be reduced, and the frequency of full tank errors can be reduced as much as possible. Can be reduced.

  In the modified example, after the game control is finished, it is determined whether or not the next game medal can be inserted, and it is determined whether or not the tank is full. After the game is over, the overflow tank 35 is determined. A full tank state can be determined before the number of medals increases. When the full tank state is determined, a full tank error state is set before the next game medal can be inserted, so that the progress of the game is disabled before the medal increases in the overflow tank 35, The amount of storage in the overflow tank 35 will not increase any more, and the full tank error state is controlled between the start of the game and the end of the control of the game, for example, the reels 2L, 2C, When the 2R is rotating, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped once and controlled to a full tank error state, and then the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are restarted when the full tank error state is released. Or when the medal payout operation is stopped by driving the hopper motor 34b, the medal payout operation is once stopped, and a full tank error state occurs. Controlling, when it is released subsequently fully Tan'era state, it is not necessary to perform complicated control such or to resume dispensing operation of medals. That is, it is not necessary to perform control such as interrupting the game control once and then restarting the game control, and the control related to the progress of the game can be prevented from becoming complicated. In addition, since the determination of the full tank state and the accompanying control of the full tank error state are performed almost simultaneously, there is no need to hold information indicating that the full tank state has been determined.

  In the modified example, after the game control is finished, it is determined whether or not the next game medal can be inserted, and it is determined whether or not the tank is full at the end of the game control. Even if it is determined whether or not, the full tank state can be determined after the game is over and before the medal is increased in the overflow tank 35.

  Also, in this case, when a full tank state is determined, the full tank error state may be controlled before proceeding to the next game. In this case, the game control is once interrupted and then the game It is not necessary to perform control such as resuming the control of the game, and it is possible to prevent the control related to the progress of the game from becoming complicated. In addition, since the determination of the full tank state and the accompanying control of the full tank error state are performed almost simultaneously, there is no need to hold information indicating that the full tank state has been determined.

  Next, commands that the main CPU 41a transmits to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a sends a BET command, an internal winning command, a reel rotation start command, a reel stop command, a winning determination command, a payout start command, a payout end command, a gaming state command, a standby command to the effect control board 90. A plurality of types of commands including a stop command, an error command, an initialization command, a setting end command, a power-on command, an operation detection command, and a door command are transmitted.

  The BET command is a command that can specify the number of medals inserted, that is, the number of medals used to set the bet number. When a medal is inserted, the one-BET switch 5 or the MAX BET switch 6 is operated to set the bet number. Sent when

  The internal winning command is a command that can specify the winning status of the internal winning flag and the type of the internal winning flag that has been established, and is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game.

  The reel rotation start command is a command for notifying the start of reel rotation, and is transmitted when rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started.

  The reel stop command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, the area number of the corresponding reel stop operation position, and the area number of the corresponding reel stop position. And is transmitted every time stop control of each reel is performed.

  The winning determination command is a command that can specify the presence / absence of winning, the type of winning, and the number of medals to be paid out at the time of winning, and is transmitted after all the reels are stopped and the winning determination is performed.

  The payout start command is a command for notifying the start of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals is started by paying out a prize or credit (including medals used for setting the number of bets). The payout end command is a command for notifying the end of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals by winning and winning a credit is completed.

  The game state command is the game state of the next game (whether it is an initial game state, is in RT (1), is in RT (2), is in BB, is in RB, etc.) And RT (1) and (2) are commands that can specify the number of remaining games and the currently set value, and are transmitted after a setting end command to be described later and at the end of the game.

  The standby command is a command indicating a transition to the standby state, and after one game is over, a credit (which was used for setting the bet number) is set when the transition to the standby state is made after a predetermined time without setting the bet number. (Including medals) is sent out after the medal payout is completed and the payout end command is sent.

  The stop command is a command indicating the occurrence or release of the stop state, and after the end of the BB, the stop command indicating the occurrence of the stop state is transmitted when the ending effect waiting time has elapsed, and the reset operation is performed. When the stop state is released, a stop command indicating the release of the stop state is transmitted.

  An error command is a command that indicates the occurrence or release of an error state. When an error is determined and controlled to the error state, an error command that indicates the occurrence of the error state is sent, and a reset operation is performed to release the error state. At that time, an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is transmitted.

  The initialization command is a command indicating that the gaming state has been initialized and the start of the setting change mode, and is transmitted when the RAM 41c is initialized and shifts to the setting change mode.

  The setting end command is a command indicating the end of the setting change mode, and is transmitted when the setting ends, that is, when the setting change mode ends.

  The power-on command is a command that indicates whether or not one of the special roles has been won at power-on, and if it can be restored to the state before the power interruption at startup, it returns to the state before the power interruption. Sent when.

  The door command is a command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25, that is, ON (open state) / OFF (closed state). When the power is turned on, one game is finished (after the game is over, the bet number of the next game) Sent before the setting can be started), and when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes (ON to OFF, OFF to ON).

  The operation detection command is the detection state of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the checkout switch 10, that is, ON / OFF, and these switches are effective in the progress of the game. Whether the bet number can be set and the bet number is not yet set and the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAX BET switch 6 is accepted. It is valid when credits remain and is invalid otherwise.Acceptance of the operation of the start switch 7 is valid until the start switch 7 is operated after the specified number of bets is set, otherwise The operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is accepted after the reels are rotated at a constant speed and the reels are ready to stop. It is valid until each stop operation is detected, otherwise it is invalid.The settlement switch 10 has a credit remaining or a bet amount is set in the period from the end of the game to the start of the next game. This command is valid when the switch is active, and otherwise is invalid.) When the detection state of these switches changes, whether the acceptance of the operation is valid for the progress of the game, Sent regardless of invalid period.

  Of these commands, commands other than the door command and the operation detection command are generated in an activation process and a game process described later, temporarily stored in a normal command transmission buffer provided in a special work in the RAM 41c, and the timer interrupt process described above. Sent in (main).

  The normal command transmission buffer is provided with an area capable of storing a maximum of 16 commands so that a plurality of commands can be accumulated.

  The door command is stored in a door command transmission buffer provided in a special work in the RAM 41c in the door monitoring process in the timer interrupt process (main) described above, and is transmitted in the timer interrupt process (main) described above.

  The door command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer, and an area in which only one door command can be stored is allocated. The door command transmission buffer stores a door command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 at the time of power-on or at the end of one game, and after the change of the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25. Stored is a door command indicating the detected state. Further, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is not cleared even after the door command is transmitted, and is then overwritten by the newly stored door command. When the power is turned on or one game is finished, the door command transmission request 1 for requesting transmission of the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is set, and the door command transmission request 1 is set or the door is opened. When the detection state of the detection switch 25 changes, the door command transmission request 2 is set. When this door command transmission request 2 is set, the door stored in the door command transmission buffer is set. Command transmission is instructed.

  The operation detection command is stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer provided in the special work of the RAM 41c in the switch monitoring process in the timer interrupt process (main) described above, and is transmitted in the timer interrupt process (main) described above. The

  The operation detection command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer and the door command transmission buffer, and an area in which only one operation detection command can be stored is allocated. The operation detection command transmission buffer includes a single BET switch 5, a MAXBET switch 6, a start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, and a detection state after the change when the detection state of the settlement switch 10 is changed. An operation detection command indicating validity / invalidity of each switch at the time is stored. In addition, the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is not cleared after the operation detection command is transmitted, and is then overwritten by the newly stored operation detection command. It has become. An operation detection command transmission request is set when the detection state of any of these switches changes, and an operation detection command transmission buffer is set by setting the operation detection command transmission request. The operation detection command stored in the command is transmitted.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a executes timer interrupt processing at intervals of 0.56 ms. In the timer interrupt process, timer interrupts 1 to 4 are repeatedly performed, and processes unique to these timer interrupts 1 to 4 are performed at intervals of 2.24 ms. The command transmission process for transmitting the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, and the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is a timer allocation. The command transmission process is also executed at intervals of 2.24 ms.

  On the other hand, the sub CPU 91a acquires a command buffered in a reception buffer, which will be described later, in a timer interrupt process (sub) that is executed at an interval of 1.12 ms. For this reason, every time the main CPU 41a executes a timer interrupt process, that is, when a command transmission process is performed at an interval of 0.56 ms, there is a possibility that the sub-control unit 91 cannot receive the command normally.

  However, in the present embodiment, as described above, the main CPU 41a executes the command transmission process at a rate of once per four timer interrupt processes, that is, at an interval of 2.24 ms. By transmitting only one of the command stored in the transmission buffer, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, and the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer, a plurality of commands can be transmitted. Even in the case of continuous transmission, transmission is performed with an interval of at least 2.24 ms, and these continuously transmitted commands can be reliably acquired on the sub-control unit 91 side.

  In the present embodiment, commands other than the door command and the operation detection command are generated according to the progress of the game in the activation process or the game process, and stored in the normal command transmission buffer. In the door command, when the door command transmission request 1 for requesting transmission of the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is set in the activation process or the game process, or the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is changed. In this case, it is stored in the door command transmission buffer. The operation detection command is stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer when the detection state of any one of the BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R, and the checkout switch 10 changes. Is done.

  In the command transmission process in the timer interrupt 2, an untransmitted command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, an untransmitted door command transmission request stored in the door command transmission buffer, or an operation detection command transmission buffer When a transmission request for the stored operation detection command is detected, a delay time is set, and when the set delay time elapses, the unsent command and door command transmission buffer stored in the normal command transmission buffer The operation command stored in the door or the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is transmitted.

  Specifically, in the command transmission process, an untransmitted command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, a door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, or an operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer. When detected, the random number for delay set in the range of 0 to 17 is acquired and set in the delay counter provided in the special work of the RAM 41c.

  At this time, in the command transmission process in which the delay counter value is set and the command transmission process executed in the timer interrupt 2 thereafter, the delay counter value is decremented by 1 and when the delay counter value becomes 0, An untransmitted command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, a door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, or an operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is transmitted.

  That is, the command detected in the command transmission process is a time corresponding to a multiple of the command transmission process execution interval (2.24 ms). Specifically, the command transmission process is performed by subtracting 1 from the delay counter value acquired at that time. Is transmitted after the elapse of time (2.24 ms) {0 to 35.84 ms because the delay counter value is 0 to 17}.

  In addition, the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, and the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer are interrupted by the basic processing. Since it is performed within (main), processing is not delayed due to command delay.

  Further, in this embodiment, an area capable of storing a plurality of commands is provided in the normal command transmission buffer, the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, Alternatively, a newly generated command can be stored in an empty area of the normal command transmission buffer without waiting for transmission of the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer. That is, a plurality of commands can be stored in the normal command transmission buffer. For this reason, it can be avoided that the progress of the game is stopped due to the delay of the command transmission. This is not the case when the normal command transmission buffer is full of untransmitted commands.

  In the command storage process, when a plurality of commands are stored in the normal command transmission buffer, these commands are stored in the order of generation. In the command transmission process, the commands are transmitted in the order stored in the normal command transmission buffer. It is like that. That is, commands stored in the normal command transmission buffer are transmitted in the order in which they are generated.

  Note that the power-on command and the initialization command are transmitted with the highest priority. Before the power-on command or initialization command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, other normal commands ( Hereinafter, commands other than the door command, operation detection command, power-on command, and initialization command are called normal commands) (in the case of an initialization command, store in the normal command transmission buffer before that) Even if the normal command is not already stored since the data is also cleared, the power-on command or the initialization command is transmitted with priority.

  When a normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer and a door command transmission is requested (when the door command transmission request 2 is set), in principle, the normal command transmission buffer. The door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is transmitted with priority over the command stored in.

  Note that when the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer is a power-on command or an initialization command, or when the normal command transmission buffer stored in the normal command transmission buffer is waiting (delayed), the door command However, this is not the case when a request for transmission is requested, and the power-on command, initialization command, or normal command waiting to be transmitted is given priority, and the power-on command, initialization command, or normal command waiting to be transmitted After being sent, send a door command. If an untransmitted normal command remains in the normal command transmission buffer after transmitting a normal command waiting for transmission, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is preferentially transmitted.

  In addition, when a normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, an operation detection command transmission is requested (when an operation detection command transmission request is set), or door command transmission and operation detection. When command transmission is requested at the same time, as a rule, the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer or the door command transmission buffer is stored rather than the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer. Priority is given to the door command being sent.

  When a normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer while waiting for transmission of an operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer (during delay), or when transmission of a door command is requested However, the operation detection command waiting for transmission is transmitted with priority, and after the operation detection command waiting for transmission is transmitted, the normal command or the door command is transmitted.

  The main CPU 41a monitors the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 about every 100 ms. Specifically, in any of the timer interrupts 1 to 4 of the timer interrupt process (main), that is, in the port input process performed every 0.56 ms, an input state (door) in which the detection signal from the door open detection switch 25 is converted to a positive logic. Open detection switch 25ON = 1 (door open state), door open detection switch 25OFF = 0 (door closed state)), and is performed by timer interrupt 2 of the timer interrupt process (main), that is, every 2.24 ms. In the door monitoring process to be performed, the detection state of the detection signal of the door opening detection switch 25 acquired in the port input process described above (the input state that is the same for two consecutive times) is logically ORed for about 100 ms (45 times of the door monitoring process). Subsequently, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is determined using the result. If the calculation result is 1 when about 100 ms elapses, that is, if the door opening detection switch 25 is turned ON (opened) even once during that time, it is determined that the door opening detection switch 25 is ON. If the calculation result is 0, that is, if the door opening detection switch 25 is not turned ON (opened) even once during that time, it is determined that the door opening detection switch 25 is OFF. If the result of this determination matches the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, it is determined that there is no change in the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25. Otherwise, it is determined that the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 has changed, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is updated to a door command indicating the detection state after the change, and the door command transmission request 2 Is set to command transmission of the door command. When determining that the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 has changed, the main CPU 41a requests an update of the output state of the door opening signal to the external output board 1000 in addition to the door command transmission command.

  The main CPU 41a sets the door command transmission request 1 in the activation process or the game process when the power is turned on or at the end of one game, and requests transmission of the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer. On the other hand, in the door monitoring process, it is determined whether or not the door command transmission request 1 is set. If the door command transmission request 1 is set, it is determined that there is a door command transmission request and the door command transmission is performed. Request 2 is set to command transmission of the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer. In addition, when the door command transmission request 1 is set, the main CPU 41a requests an update of the door open signal output state for the external output board 1000 in addition to the door command transmission command.

  In this way, when commanding the transmission of the door command, it is also required to update the output state of the door opening signal to the external output board 1000, so the door opening signal output state is linked to the door command transmission command. And is updated.

  In the present embodiment, the door command is given priority over the normal command as described above, and the door command is also transmitted after a delay time determined at random has passed in the same manner as other commands. On the other hand, since the maximum command delay time is 35.84 ms, when transmission of a door command is requested in a state where the normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, after the door command is transmitted, Further, it takes about 72 ms until the normal command stored in the normal command transmission buffer is transmitted. However, the monitoring interval of the door open detection switch 25 is further stored in the normal command transmission buffer after transmitting the door command. If the detected state of the door opening detection switch 25 is continuously changed if it is shorter than about 72 ms required for transmitting the normal command being stored, the normal command transmission buffer is stored while the change continues. Normal command sending buffer will not be sent, so normal command sending buffer overflows There is a possibility become. For this reason, in this embodiment, the monitoring interval of the door opening detection switch 25 is about longer than about 72 ms required for transmitting the normal command stored in the normal command transmission buffer after transmitting the door command. Even if the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is continuously changed, the normal command is transmitted after the door command is transmitted until the next door command is transmitted. At least one normal command stored in the transmission buffer can be transmitted, so that the normal command transmission buffer does not overflow.

  The main CPU 41a monitors the detection states of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the checkout switch 10 about every 10 ms. Specifically, in the above-described port input process performed every 0.56 ms, an input state in which detection signals from the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the settlement switch 10 are converted to positive logic. (ON = 1, OFF = 0) is acquired, and the timer interrupt process (main) is performed by timer interrupt 2, that is, the switch monitoring process performed every 2.24 ms, the 1 acquired in the above-described port input process The detection state of the detection signals of the sheet BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the settlement switch 10 (input state that is the same for two consecutive times) is about 10 ms (door monitoring process 5 Times) Continue to logically OR each separately, and use the result, 1 BET switch 5, MAXB Determining T switch 6, start switch 7, stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R, the detection state of the adjusting switch 10. When the calculation result is 1 when about 10 ms elapses, that is, when ON is detected even once during that time, it is determined that the corresponding switch is ON, and when the calculation result is 0, that is, during that time If ON is not detected even once, it is determined that the corresponding switch is OFF. If the result of this determination matches the detection state of each switch indicated by the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer, it is determined that there is no change in the detection state. The operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is changed to an operation detection command that indicates the detection state after the change and indicates the validity / invalidity of each switch at that time. Update, set operation detection command transmission request, and instruct transmission of the operation detection command.

  Next, the control of the effect performed by the sub control unit 91 based on a command transmitted from the main CPU 41a to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  The sub CPU 91a executes a command reception interrupt process when a strobe signal indicating the transmission of a command from the main CPU 41a is input. In the command reception interrupt process, the command acquired from the command transmission line is stored in the reception buffer provided in the RAM 91c.

  The receiving buffer is provided with an area capable of storing a maximum of 128 commands so that a plurality of commands can be accumulated.

  In the timer interrupt process (sub), the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not an unprocessed command is stored in the reception buffer. If an unprocessed command is stored, the sub CPU 91a is the earliest stage. Based on the received command, the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b is referred to. Based on the control contents registered in the control pattern table, various effects such as the liquid crystal display 51, the effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, the reel LED 55, etc. Control the device.

  In this embodiment, the time interval (1.12 ms) at which the sub CPU 91a performs the timer interrupt process (sub) is shorter than the time interval (2.24 ms) at which the main CPU 41a transmits a command. If an operation associated with a normal game is performed, an unprocessed command stored in the reception buffer is not received until the next command is received even when commands are continuously transmitted from the main CPU 41a. It is read by the timer interrupt process (sub), and a plurality of unprocessed commands are not accumulated in the reception buffer. When a command transmitted from the main CPU 41a is received, the timer interrupt process performed first after that The command received by (sub) is read and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  In the control pattern table, the display pattern of the liquid crystal display 51 corresponding to the type of command, the lighting mode of the lighting effect LED 52, the output mode of the speakers 53 and 54, the lighting mode of the reel LED, etc. The control patterns of these effect devices are registered, and when the sub CPU 91a receives the command, the sub CPU 91a, among the control patterns registered corresponding to the effect patterns set in the RAM 91c in the game of the control pattern table, With reference to the control pattern corresponding to the received command type, the rendering device is controlled based on the control pattern. Thereby, the production according to the production pattern and the progress of the game is executed.

  If the sub CPU 91a receives a new command during execution of an effect triggered by the reception of a certain command, the sub CPU 91a stops the effect based on the control pattern being executed, and responds to the newly received command. An effect based on the control pattern is executed. In other words, even if the production is not finished to the end, when a new command is received, the production that was being executed is canceled and a new command is received unless the received new command is not a command that triggers a new production. An effect based on the command is executed.

  In particular, in this embodiment, when an operation for setting the number of bets is performed during execution of an effect, that is, when the sub CPU 91a receives a BET command indicating that the number of bets has been set, the effect being executed is canceled. It is supposed to be. For this reason, if the player wants to proceed to the next game rather than seeing the production to the end, the production is canceled and the next game can be started. There is no. Further, when a credit or bet amount adjustment operation is performed during the performance, that is, after the sub CPU 91a receives a game state command indicating the end of the game, and before receiving an internal winning command indicating the start of the game. When the payout start command is received, the performance being executed is stopped. Credits and bets are settled when the game is terminated. In such a case, by terminating the performance that is being executed, there is an intention to end the game, but the performance continues unnecessarily. It is designed not to be overwhelmed.

  When the internal winning command is received, the effect pattern is selected at a selection rate corresponding to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command, and is set in the RAM 91c. The selection rate of the effect pattern is registered in the effect table stored in the ROM 91b. When the sub CPU 91a receives the internal winning command, it is registered in the effect table according to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command. The selected selection pattern is selected from a plurality of types of production patterns according to the selection rate, and the selected production pattern is set in the RAM 91c as the production pattern of the game.

  The control pattern table contains specific controls that are referred to when a specific command (standby command, stop command, error command, initialization command, setting end command, power-on command indicating that special role is elected, etc.) is received. When the pattern is stored and the sub CPU 91a receives these specific commands, the sub CPU 91a refers to the specific control pattern corresponding to the command regardless of the effect pattern set in the game, and The rendering device is controlled based on the pattern.

  When a standby command is received, a demo pattern for executing a demonstration effect (demonstration effect) is referred to as a control pattern. In addition, when the final effect that informs the winning of the special role is being executed, the execution of the demo effect is prohibited, and the demo pattern is controlled even if a standby command is received in such a state. It is not referred to as a pattern, and no demonstration effect is executed.

  When a stop command indicating the occurrence of a stop state is received, a stop notification pattern for notifying that the stop state is in effect is referred to as a control pattern. When a stop command indicating release of the stop state is received, the above-described demo pattern is referred to as a control pattern. That is, when the stop state is released, the demonstration effect is executed.

  When an error command indicating the occurrence of an error state is received, an error notification pattern for notifying the fact of the error state and its type is referred to as a control pattern. When an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is received, the control pattern that was being executed when the error occurred is referred to. That is, the production at the time of error occurrence is executed from the beginning.

  When the initialization command is received, a setting notification pattern for notifying that the setting is being changed is referred to. When the setting end command is received, the demo pattern described above is referred to as a control pattern. In other words, when an initialization command is received, a notification during setting change is executed, and when a setting end command is received thereafter, a demonstration effect is executed.

  When a power-on command indicating that a special role is won is received, a special role notification pattern for notifying that the special role has been won is referred to. That is, when a power-on command indicating that the special role is won is received, a notification effect for notifying that the special role is won is executed. Note that the notification effect for notifying the winning of the special combination is once executed until it receives a winning determination command indicating that the special combination has won.

  Regardless of whether or not the effect state before power interruption can be restored based on the data stored in the RAM 91c at the time of activation, the sub CPU 91a receives an initialization command or a power-on command before actually starting the effect. Wait until either is received. When the initialization command is received in this state, the data in the RAM 91c is cleared. In addition, when a power-on command indicating that the special role is elected is received in this state, a notice effect indicating that the special role is elected is executed, and when a power-on command indicating that the special role is not elected is received, If it is possible to return to the performance state before the power interruption, the demonstration is performed. Also, in the state of waiting for receiving the initialization command or the power-on command, the execution of the timer interrupt process that executes the presentation based on the reception of the command is not permitted, and even when other commands are received, An effect based on the command is not performed, and no effect is performed until the initialization command or the power-on command is received after the startup and the execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted.

  For this reason, even if the command transmission lines of the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are disconnected when the power is turned on and the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are connected thereafter, the sub control unit 91 does not Since no initialization command has been received, the production control is not performed, and even when the command transmission lines of the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are disconnected at the time of startup, the sub control unit 91 is turned on. It is impossible to avoid receiving the command and avoid the execution of the notification effect indicating that the special role is won. Thus, when the main control unit 41 is started, the state before power interruption is restored, and before power interruption. When the special role is elected, the winning of the special role is surely notified.

  On the other hand, it is necessary to turn off the power once to connect unauthorized tools such as driving tools (disconnecting the connector without turning off the power). With the above configuration, the connector is forcibly released. Even if the special tool is won by using a driving tool, it can be easily determined from the outside that the special role is won when the main control unit 41 is restarted. A slot machine set in a state where a special role is won using a driving tool, and BB and BB (BB (1) and BB (2)), which will be described later, have won a higher advantage. Slot machine set to a state with high possibility (In this embodiment, it is suggested that BB is likely to be won when “Cherry” stops in the middle of the right reel as described later. BB won Possibility that it can be set to a high state.) Can be effectively suppressed illegal sales such offers to the player customer in the amusement shop sales start like.

  Further, the notification effect is continuously executed until a winning determination command indicating the winning of the special role is received, that is, until the winning special role is won. For this reason, until the special role wins, that is, until the winning flag of the special role is cleared, the notification effect will not stop, and it is not possible to cancel the notification effect while maintaining the special role win by the amusement store. Therefore, a slot machine set in a state in which a special role is won using a driving tool, and BB and BB (BB (1) and BB (2)), which will be described later, are more advantageous. Unauthorized sales such as providing a slot machine set to a state where the possibility of winning is high to a player at the start of business at a game store or the like can be further effectively prevented.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the main control unit 41 is activated, the main CPU 41a returns to the state before the power interruption and the special CPU is elected before the power interruption. When the sub-control unit 91 transmits a command and receives a power-on command indicating that the special role is won, the sub-control unit 91 controls the liquid crystal display 51 and the effect LED 52 that control the notification effect indicating that the special role is won. , Such as speakers 53, 54, reel LED 55, etc., even if the special role is won illegally, when the main control unit 41 is restarted, the special role is won. Since it is informed by the effect device and becomes more easily discriminating, the slot machine set to the state in which the special role is won using the driving tool, and RB, BB (BB (1) described later) And In BB (2)), the BB with higher advantage is more likely to be elected Slot machines that are set to be highly likely to be offered to players at the start of operations at amusement stores, etc. Can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, the special device winning is notified by the effect device controlled by the sub-control unit 91. However, when the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before the power interruption, and When the special role is elected before the interruption of power, the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, and the payout display 13 directly controlled by the main control unit 41 may notify the special role. good. In addition, a notification LED for notifying the winning of the special role is provided as an electronic component that is directly controlled by the main control unit 41. When the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before the power interruption, and the special role is selected before the power interruption In this case, the notification LED may be used to notify the winning of the special role.

  Further, in this embodiment, the connector restricting member is provided only for the connector connection between the electronic control component (inserted medal sensor 31) that inputs or outputs a signal to the game control board 40 and the game control board 40 as the game progresses. The use of unauthorized devices is also prevented by restricting the release of connections between the connectors, but when the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before the power interruption, and the special role is elected before the power interruption. In this case, it is possible to prevent the use of a driving tool regardless of whether or not a structure for restricting the insertion / removal between the connectors is used, so that the structure for restricting the insertion / removal between the connectors is not used. By doing so, it is not necessary to change the structure of parts in order to regulate the insertion and removal of connectors, and maintainability in the event of a failure, etc. It can be improved.

  Based on the reception of the door command, the sub CPU 91a issues a door opening notification indicating that the front door 1b is opened. Specifically, when the sub CPU 91a receives a door command, if no new door command is received after 100 ms, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the received door command is confirmed and detected. If the confirmation detection state is ON (door open), the door open notification is performed. In the door opening notification, the effect effect LED 52 blinks, the door opening notification screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and an error warning sound is output. After that, the door command is received, and even if 100 ms elapses, the door command is not received and the detection state indicated by the door command becomes the definite detection state. If the definite detection state is OFF (door closed), the door is opened. Stops the notification and returns to the original performance.

  In addition, when a door command is newly received within 100 ms after the last door command is received, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the previously received command is not set as the definite detection state. If no door command is received even after 100 ms after receiving a new door command, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the last received door command is set as the detection state, and the determination detection state is If it is ON (door open), the door open notification is performed, and if the definite detection state is OFF (door closed), the door open notification is stopped.

  For this reason, even if a door command indicating that the door opening detection switch 25 is ON (door opening) is received in a state where the door opening notification is not performed, the door opening detection switch 25 is turned OFF (door closing) within 100 ms. When the door command is received, the door opening notification is not performed, and even when the door command indicating that the door opening detection switch 25 is OFF (door closed) is received in the state where the door opening notification is being performed, 100 ms thereafter. If the door command indicating ON of the door opening detection switch 25 (door opening) is received within, the door opening notification is not stopped.

  In addition, when a door command is received continuously within an interval of 100 ms, such as when a new door command is received within 100 ms after receiving a door command and then a new door command is received within 100 ms thereafter. In the meantime, the state of the door opening notification is maintained (if the door opening notification is not performed, the door opening notification is not started, and if the door opening notification is performed, it is continued) After the last received door command, the door opening notification state is determined based on the detection state determined when 100 ms elapses, the door opening notification has been performed so far, and the determined detection state is ON (door opening) If the detected state is OFF (door closed), the door opening notification is stopped while the door is open until then. If the detection is not performed and the determined detection state is OFF (door closed), the door opening notification is not performed. If the determined detection state is ON (door opening), the door opening notification is started. .

  Thus, in this embodiment, the main CPU 41a only transmits a door command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25, and determines whether or not the front door 1b is opened from the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25. The sub CPU 91a determines whether or not the front door 1b is opened based on the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the door command received from the main CPU 41a, and based on the determination result. The door opening notification is performed.

  The front door 1b needs to be opened in order to perform some illegal act on the parts inside the slot machine 1 such as the game control board 40. Therefore, such fraud can be effectively prevented and can be detected early even if fraud is made.

  Conventionally, in the case of notifying the opening of the front door, the game control is performed based on the signal input to the game control means in spite of the fact that the effect control means performs error notification in order to reduce the control load of the game control means. It is necessary for the means to determine whether or not the front door has been opened, and the control load on the game control means cannot be reduced sufficiently.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the main CPU 41a monitors the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 about every 100 ms, and when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes, the door showing the detection state after the change. Only by transmitting a command, it is not determined whether the front door 1b is opened based on the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25, and the sub CPU 91a detects the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the door command received from the main CPU 41a. It is determined whether or not the front door 1b is open based on the detected state of the door, and the door open notification is performed based on the determination result, so the main CPU 41a notifies the opening of the front door 1b. In determining whether or not the front door 1b is open from the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 (door open detection switch Chi chattering prevention determination of 25) it is not necessary to perform, it is possible to reduce the control load on the main CPU 41a.

  Even when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 has not changed, the main CPU 41a transmits a door command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 at that time when the main CPU 41a is activated and when one game is over. Therefore, even when the sub CPU 91a misses the door command at the time of change, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 can be always acquired at the time of starting and at the end of one game. Even if the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 does not change after the failure, the state in which the change in the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is not reflected in the door opening notification can be prevented from continuing.

  In addition, the main CPU 41a, as a general rule, when the transmission of the door command is requested (when the door command transmission request 2 is set) when the normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer. The door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is given priority over the command stored in the command transmission buffer, and the monitoring interval of the door open detection switch 25 and the transmission of the door command are transmitted. The error of the interval can be suppressed as much as possible.

  In the normal command transmission waiting state (during delay) stored in the normal command transmission buffer, the delayed normal command is given priority over the door command, and the delay time has already been reached. Even though the timing is started, the delay control is not complicated by interrupting the timing. Further, the power-on command and the initialization command are transmitted with priority over all commands including the door command, and the return of the sub CPU 91a is delayed by transmitting other commands first. There is nothing.

  In this embodiment, once the door command transmission request 2 for commanding the transmission of the door command is set once, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes until the door command based on the command is transmitted. The door command is not updated, and even when the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 changes while waiting for transmission of the power-on command or the initialization command, the door command is overwritten without being transmitted. Can be prevented.

  Also, in this embodiment, a door command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer, and transmission management becomes complicated when the door command is transmitted with priority over the normal command. There is no end.

  In this embodiment, the door command is stored in the transmission buffer in the timer interrupt process (main) that periodically interrupts and executes the basic process, whereas the normal command is transmitted in the basic process. When storing door commands and normal commands in the same transmission buffer, it is necessary to disable interrupts when storing normal commands in the transmission buffer. If a door command is stored while interrupting while being stored in the transmission buffer, the normal command being processed will be overwritten, and the door command will be partially overwritten after returning. In such a configuration, interrupts are prohibited every time a normal command is stored, causing blurring of reel rotation and medals to be paid out. However, as described above, the door command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer as described above. It is necessary to prohibit interrupts when storing normal commands, even if the normal command is stored in the transmission buffer in the basic processing, and stored in the transmission buffer in the timer interrupt processing (main) executed by interrupt. This eliminates the above problems.

  In this embodiment, the monitoring interval of the door opening detection switch 25 is the monitoring interval of the door opening detection switch 25 until the normal command stored in the normal command transmission buffer is transmitted after the door command is transmitted. Therefore, even when the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 is continuously changed, the next door command is transmitted after the door command is transmitted. In the meantime, at least one normal command stored in the normal command transmission buffer can be transmitted, so that the normal command transmission buffer does not overflow.

  The sub CPU 91a determines whether or not the single BET switch 5, the MAX BET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the settlement switch 10 are operated based on the reception of the operation detection command. Specifically, when the sub CPU 91a receives an operation detection command, if no new operation detection command is received after 100 ms, the detection state of each switch indicated by the received operation detection command is confirmed and detected. If any of the switches has changed from the OFF state to the ON state as compared to the previous fixed detection state, it is determined that the corresponding switch has been operated, and any of the switches is ON. If the state has changed to the OFF state, it is determined that the operation of the corresponding switch has been released.

  For this reason, even when an operation detection command is received and the detection state of any switch has changed, if an operation detection command indicating the same detection state as before the change is received within 100 ms, The operation or release of the operation is not determined.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, the detection state of the checkout switch 10, that is, ON / OFF, these switches are in progress of the game. Whether an operation detection command indicating whether the switch is in a valid state or an invalid state is valid for the progress of the game when the switch detection state changes. The sub CPU 91a can identify the operation detected by the main CPU 41a regardless of whether or not the operation is valid, so that one sheet is transmitted. Operation of BET switch 5, MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, and settlement switch 10 In addition to the timing when the control of the game is made effective and coincides with the timing at which the control of the game proceeds, the effect is executed when the operation of these switches is invalid, that is, at a timing not directly related to the control of the game It becomes possible.

  In other words, in order to perform a production operation, a new detection means is not installed, but the operation means is originally installed for advancing the game and detected by the main CPU 41a. It is possible to perform operations for performance even in a disabled state in progress, and the sub CPU 91a can perform performance using the operations of these operation means, so that the timing of the performance can be varied. You can have it.

  In addition, it is possible to specify whether the operation of each switch is valid or invalid from the operation detection command, and the sub CPU 91a operates the switch when receiving the operation detection command. An appropriate effect can be executed depending on whether or not the reception period is valid.

  Further, when transmitting the operation detection command, the main CPU 41a transmits an operation detection command indicating the detection state of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the settlement switch 10. However, it is not determined whether or not the switch is operated based on the detection state. The sub CPU 91a determines that the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, and the like based on the detection state indicated by the operation detection command received from the main CPU 41a. Since it is determined whether the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R and the checkout switch 10 are operated and the operation status of these switches can be grasped based on the determination result, the main CPU 41a Send operation detection command Therefore, it is not necessary to determine whether or not a switch in an invalid period, that is, a switch that is not related to the progress control of the game is operated (e.g., chattering prevention determination), and the control load on the main CPU 41a is reduced. can do.

  Further, the main CPU 41a, when the normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, when transmission of the operation detection command is requested (when the operation detection command transmission request is set), or the door command When transmission and operation detection command transmission are requested at the same time, as a rule, commands stored in the normal command transmission buffer or door command transmission rather than operation detection commands stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer are sent. The door command stored in the trust buffer is preferentially transmitted, and the transmission of the normal command and the door command is not delayed by the transmission of the operation detection command.

  When a normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer while waiting for transmission of an operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer (during delay), or when transmission of a door command is requested In this case, the operation detection command during the delay is transmitted with priority, and the delay control is not complicated by interrupting it even though the delay time has already started. .

  Further, in this embodiment, once an operation detection command transmission request for instructing transmission of an operation detection command is set, the detection state of any switch changes until an operation detection command based on the command is transmitted. However, the operation detection command is not updated, and the operation detection command can be prevented from being overwritten without being transmitted.

  In this embodiment, an operation detection command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer and the door command transmission buffer, and the normal command and the door command are transmitted with priority over the operation detection command. In this case, the transmission management does not become complicated.

  In this embodiment, the operation detection command is stored in the transmission buffer in the timer interrupt process (main) that periodically interrupts and executes the basic process, whereas the normal command is transmitted in the basic process. Since it is configured to store in the buffer, if the operation detection command and the normal command are stored in the same transmission buffer, it is necessary to prohibit interrupts when storing the normal command in the transmission buffer (normally If an operation detection command is stored while the command is being stored in the transmission buffer, the normal command being processed will be overwritten, and the operation detection command will be partially overwritten after returning. In such a configuration, interrupts are prohibited every time a normal command is stored, causing reel rotation fluctuations and However, it may affect other controls such as blurring at the time of paying out the command. However, as described above, the operation detection command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer. Even when the normal command is stored in the transmission buffer in the timer interruption process (main) that periodically interrupts and executes the basic process, the normal command is stored in the transmission buffer in the basic process. It is no longer necessary to prohibit interrupts, and the above problems can be solved.

  The sub CPU 91a and the touch panel controller 99 are connected so that data can be transmitted and received by serial communication.

  The sub CPU 91a instructs the touch panel controller 99 to perform a hardware reset at the time of activation, initializes the touch panel controller 99, analyzes the status report transmitted from the touch panel controller 99 upon completion of the initialization, and detects an abnormality. If not, a system-on command is transmitted to activate the touch panel controller 99 system. Accordingly, the touch panel controller 99 shifts to a state in which a touch operation can be detected.

  In addition, when the response to the command transmitted to the touch panel controller 99 is not returned even after a certain period of time, even when the sub CPU 91a is not activated, the sub CPU 91a instructs the hardware reset of the touch panel controller 99 similarly to the activation. The system is supposed to restart.

  The touch panel controller 99 determines that the corresponding beam coordinate is a defective beam when any of the beams from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b is blocked continuously for 60 seconds based on the signals from the light receiving devices 57a and 57b. Thereafter, the detection of the touch operation at the beam coordinates determined as the defective beam is invalidated, and the detection of the touch operation is performed only with the validated beam. After that, when the shielding state from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b is released, the detection of the touch operation at the invalidated beam coordinates is enabled again.

  As described above, the touch panel controller 99 determines that the beam is defective when any of the beams from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b is blocked continuously for 60 seconds, and invalidates the corresponding beam coordinates. If the light receiving devices 57a, 57b and the light emitting devices 56a, 56b are damaged, if a solid object is attached, or if a defective beam is generated due to the object being placed, only the defective beam is invalidated, The touch operation can be detected by an effective beam, so that the touch panel can function normally even if a defective beam occurs. The touch panel can be used even though the touch operation can be detected by a normal beam. It can be prevented from disappearing.

  In this embodiment, the invalid beam coordinates determined to be a defective beam are validated when the shielding state from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b is released, and are automatically restored. However, for example, the touch panel controller 99 may be restored upon a hardware reset or the like.

  In addition, the sub CPU 91a transmits a defective beam analysis request command every second. When the touch panel controller 99 receives the defective beam analysis request command, the touch panel controller 99 returns a report indicating the shielded beam and the shielding time among the beams from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b. Then, when the report returned from the touch panel controller 99 indicates that there are two or more continuous beams that have been shielded for 10 seconds or longer, the sub CPU 91a causes the liquid crystal display 51 to display Please display "and notify the user to remove the object on the touch panel.

  Thus, when there are two or more continuous beams that are shielded for a certain period of time among the beams from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b, that is, when there is a possibility that an object is located on the touch panel, Since the notification for prompting the removal is performed, a defective beam due to the presence of these objects can be detected and eliminated at an early stage.

  In addition, since the notification that prompts the removal of the object is performed at an earlier stage than the time until the beam coordinates associated with the defective beam are invalidated, the cause of the defective beam can be removed before the beam coordinates are invalidated. It becomes possible.

  It should be noted that the sub CPU 91a notifies the user that the object is to be removed, and then returns a report indicating that there are no two or more consecutive beams that are shielded for 10 seconds or more, that is, the object. Is removed and the defective beam is eliminated, or when a certain time (30 seconds) has elapsed, that is, when an object is left on or the light receiving devices 57a and 57b and the light emitting devices 56a and 56b are damaged. In this case, the notification is stopped.

  The effect control board 90 of the present embodiment can perform an operation test of each part mounted on the effect control board 90 by connecting a command simulator (test game control board) before shipment.

  In the operation test, an inspection command specifying a component to be operated by the command simulator and its operation mode is transmitted.

  The slot machine 1 of this embodiment is equipped with LED, lamp, cold-cathode tube and other electrical components, a speaker, a liquid crystal display 51, and a touch panel controlled by the sub-control unit 91. An output port and its output port It is possible to inspect the operation of the designated part by designating the part corresponding to 1 and its operation mode by the inspection command. The inspection command is composed of 2 bytes. The output port is designated by the first byte, and the component to be operated and the operation mode are designated by the second byte.

  In the inspection command that inspects the operation of the lighting component, you can specify lighting and extinguishing as the operation mode, and if the lighting component can turn on multiple colors, you can also specify the lighting color It is.

  In the inspection command to inspect the operation of the speaker, as the operation mode, the output from both left and right only, the type of sound to be output, and the ROM check of the sound ROM (ROM that stores sound data output from the speaker) Can be specified.

  In the inspection command for inspecting the operation of the liquid crystal display 51, the operation mode includes color bar display, red display, green display, blue display, white display, black display, electrostatic test screen display, CGROM (liquid crystal display 51 ROM check of image data (CG data to be displayed on CG), display area check of liquid crystal display 51, display of image data A to D stored in CGROM, and check of VRAM. Is possible.

  In the inspection command for inspecting the operation of the touch panel, it is possible to specify a defective beam check of the touch panel and an operation check of the touch panel as operation modes. When a touch panel defect check is designated, the voice ROM and CGROM ROM checks are also designated at the same time.

  As another inspection command, there is an inspection command for confirming the backup of the bonus medium effect. In this inspection command, the display of the bonus medium screen, the operation of the electrical components in the bonus, and the BGM output in the bonus are designated.

  In one inspection command, it is possible to specify only one output port, components corresponding to the output port, and operation modes, and when different components of the output port are operated simultaneously and inspected, Send inspection commands with specified ports continuously. For this reason, it is necessary to transmit 40 inspection commands continuously even if only the test for operating all the electrical parts is performed, and the operation of parts other than the electrical parts is also tested at the same time. In some cases, it is necessary to continuously transmit a maximum of 128 inspection commands according to the combination.

  Note that in the command simulator, an inspection command for designating the operation of a plurality of illumination parts, an examination command for designating the operation of the illumination parts, an inspection command for designating the operation of the speaker, and an inspection command for designating the operation of the liquid crystal display 51 The inspection command for designating the operation of the speaker and the inspection command for designating the operation of the liquid crystal display 51 can be transmitted at the same time. It is not possible to simultaneously transmit operation commands that specify operations that cannot be performed simultaneously, such as inspection commands that specify the operation of the liquid crystal display 51 and inspection commands that specify the operation of the touch panel. It has become.

  As described above, if an operation associated with a normal game is being performed, an unprocessed command stored in the reception buffer is the next command even when commands are continuously transmitted from the main CPU 41a. Since it is read out by the timer interrupt process (sub) before reception, a plurality of unprocessed commands are not stored in the reception buffer. Since there is a possibility of transmission, an area capable of storing 128 commands is provided in the reception buffer of the RAM 91c.

  The sub CPU 91a determines whether or not an unprocessed command is stored in the reception buffer in the timer interrupt process (sub). The received command is read out, and it is determined whether or not the read command is an inspection command. As a result, when the read command is an inspection command, the component specified by the inspection command and its operation mode are specified, and the specified component is operated in the specified operation mode. As a result, the operation status based on the inspection command transmitted from the command simulator can be confirmed from the outside.

  When the sub CPU 91a receives an inspection command for inspecting the operation of the electrical component, the sub CPU 91a identifies the electrical component specified by the inspection command and its operation mode such as lighting, extinction, and lighting color, and designates the corresponding electrical component. The operation is performed in the mode described above.

  When the sub CPU 91a receives an inspection command for inspecting the operation of the speaker, the operation designated by the inspection command such as output from both the left only, the right only from both the left and right, the type of sound to be output, and the ROM check of the audio ROM The mode is specified, and the speaker is operated in the specified operation mode. In particular, when the ROM check of the voice ROM is designated, the confirmation data stored in the voice ROM is compared with the stored data stored in the ROM 91b, and the result of whether or not they match is determined. It is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  Further, when the sub CPU 91a receives an inspection command for inspecting the operation of the liquid crystal display 51, the display of the color bar, red display, green display, blue display, white display, black display, and electrostatic test screen is displayed. The operation mode specified by the inspection command such as the CGROM ROM check, the display area check of the liquid crystal display 51, the display of the image data A to D stored in the CGROM, the VRAM check is specified, and the liquid crystal display 51 is specified. It operates in the mode of operation. In particular, when the ROM check of the CGROM is designated, the confirmation data stored in the CGROM is compared with the stored data stored in the ROM 91b as in the case of the ROM check of the audio ROM. The result of whether or not to do so is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. When the display area check of the liquid crystal display 51 is designated, an image showing the displayable area is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. When the VRAM check is designated, the VRAM is expanded in the memory area and an image for VRAM check is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  Further, when the sub CPU 91a receives an inspection command for inspecting the operation of the touch panel, the sub CPU 91a specifies an operation mode designated by the inspection command, such as a check for a defective beam on the touch panel, an operation check on the touch panel, and the touch panel and the liquid crystal display 51. Operate in the specified operation mode. In particular, when a check for a defective beam on the touch panel is designated, a defective beam analysis request command is transmitted to the touch panel controller 99, and whether there is a beam that is blocked for 60 seconds or more based on the returned report. If there is a beam that is shielded for 60 seconds or longer, a red line is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 in correspondence with the shielded beam. In addition, when the check of the defective beam of the touch panel is designated, the voice ROM and the CGROM are also checked. In addition, there are two types of touch panel operation checks. When operation check 1 is specified, the touch panel is fully activated, a ticker “Please touch” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and a touch operation is detected. The reception of a new command is prohibited until it is done. When the operation check 2 is designated, the entire touch panel is enabled, and a 64 divided screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the color of the frame where the touch operation is detected is changed. Also in this case, reception of a new command is prohibited until a touch operation is detected.

  Further, when the sub CPU 91a receives the inspection command for inspecting the backup of the bonus medium effect, the sub CPU 91a specifies the part and operation mode specified by the inspection command, and the operation in which the liquid crystal display 51, the speaker, and the electrical decoration part are specified. Operate in a manner.

  As described above, the sub CPU 91a identifies the component specified by the inspection command and its operation mode based on the reception of the inspection command, and operates the identified component in the specified operation mode. The operation status based on the inspection command transmitted from the simulator can be confirmed from the outside.

  In general, the production control means has the same number of reception buffers as the transmission buffers of the game control means, and the number of transmission buffers and the number of reception buffers do not overflow assuming a normal game. The number of commands is not transmitted continuously as long as the game is normally played, so the command transmitted from the game control means is not transmitted. There is no overflow. However, in the operation test for inspecting whether or not the production control means operates normally during development or before shipment as described above, a large number of commands are connected by connecting the test game control means to the production control means. It is possible to increase the efficiency of the operation test by continuously transmitting the data.However, if the number of reception buffers is the same as the number of transmission buffers as described above, a large number of commands are sent during the operation test. If it is transmitted, the receiving buffer overflows, and there is a possibility that the operation test cannot be performed accurately. For this reason, it is necessary to increase the number of commands or transmission intervals that are continuously transmitted during the operation test, and as a result, there arises a problem that the efficiency of the operation test cannot be sufficiently increased.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the command that the main control unit 41 transmits to the sub control unit 91 is stored in the reception buffer that stores the command received by the sub control unit 91 from the main control unit 41. A storage area capable of storing a larger number of commands than the command storage area of the command transmission buffer is provided. Accordingly, when an operation test board such as a command simulator is connected to the effect control board 90 and an operation test is performed, the number of inspection commands that can be transmitted at one time and the transmission interval can be transmitted even when the inspection commands are continuously transmitted. However, the number of storage areas of the normal command transmission buffer provided in the main control unit 41, that is, the number of storage areas allocated as many as possible so as not to overflow assuming a normal game (16 commands in this embodiment) The number of test commands can be continuously transmitted up to the limit of the receiving buffer storage area (128 commands in this embodiment) without being limited according to the efficiency of the operation test. Can be effectively increased.

  Further, in this embodiment, for each inspection command, a plurality of lighting parts, liquid crystal display 51, touch panel and other effect parts can be individually designated and an operation test can be performed. By transmitting an inspection command for designating each production component such as a certain electrical decoration component, liquid crystal display 51, and touch panel, it is possible to accurately inspect whether or not each production component operates normally.

  In the present embodiment, when an operation test is performed in the slot machine 1, it is possible to specify only one output port, a production component corresponding to the output port, and an operation mode thereof with one inspection command. Therefore, a storage area that can store a larger number of commands based on the number of output ports is provided in the storage area of the reception buffer, and operation tests of all the production parts are performed collectively. In this case, even when the inspection commands corresponding to the respective output ports are continuously transmitted, the reception buffer does not overflow, so that the operation test can be performed more efficiently.

  In this embodiment, it is possible to specify only one output port, a production component corresponding to the output port and its operation mode with one inspection command, but with one inspection command, It may be possible to specify only one performance component and its operation correspondence. In this case, by providing a storage area in the reception buffer that can store more commands than the number of performance components, When performing production component operation tests in a batch, even if inspection commands corresponding to each production component are sent continuously, the reception buffer does not overflow, so the operation test is more efficient. It can be performed.

  In the gaming machine in which the production control means controls the production according to the operation of the production operation means such as a touch panel as in the present embodiment, it is necessary to inspect the detection status of the operation of the production operation means. If the next inspection command is mistakenly transmitted before the operation is detected, the next inspection command is received without waiting for the detection of the operation of the operation means for production, and the next operation test is performed. There is a problem that the detection of the operation detection status of the operation means for production cannot be normally performed.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91a according to the present embodiment receives the inspection command designating the touch panel operation check and performs the touch panel operation check, the sub CPU 91a performs the command reception interrupt process until the touch operation is detected. During this period, new commands are not received, and even if a new command is transmitted during this period, the new command is not detected until the touch operation is detected and the operation check is completed. It is not received and processing based on the command is not performed. For this reason, even when the inspection command is erroneously transmitted without waiting for the completion of the operation check of the touch panel, the operation check inspection of the touch panel can be normally performed.

  The sub CPU 91a not only prohibits command reception interrupt processing but also stores it in the reception buffer until a touch operation is detected after receiving the inspection command designating the touch panel operation check. Even if the command is already received and the received command is stored in the reception buffer, the touch operation is detected and the operation check is completed. The processing based on the command stored in the reception buffer is not performed. For this reason, even when another inspection command is transmitted in succession to the inspection command designating the touch panel operation check, the touch panel operation check inspection can be performed normally.

  In this embodiment, the touch panel is applied as the production operation means. However, production operation means other than the touch panel, such as buttons and dials, may be applied, and operation checks other than the production operation means other than the touch panel may be performed. Even in the case of performing the operation check, even if the inspection command is erroneously transmitted without waiting for the completion of the operation check by prohibiting the reception of the command until the operation of the effect operating means is detected in the same manner as described above. The inspection can be performed normally, and the command stored in the reception buffer is not read out until the operation of the production operation means is detected, so that another inspection command specifying the operation check is continuously performed. Even when the inspection command is transmitted, the operation check can be normally performed.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the prescribed number of bets that can be set according to the gaming state is determined as described above, and the prescribed number of bets that are determined according to the gaming state is set. It becomes possible to start the game on the condition. In this embodiment, as will be described later, as a gaming state, a regular bonus (hereinafter referred to as RB), an initial gaming state, RT (1) (replay time (1)), RT (2) (replay time (2) However, 3 is defined as the prescribed number of bets in any gaming state. Therefore, regardless of whether the gaming state is RB, the initial gaming state, RT (1), or RT (2), the game can be started when 3 is set as the bet number. It becomes possible. In this embodiment, when a specified number of bets according to the gaming state is set, all the winning lines L1 to L5 are activated. As a result, all winning lines L1 to L5 are activated at the time when 3 is set.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, the activated pay line (in the present embodiment, all the pay lines are always enabled. The activated winning line is simply referred to as a winning line), and a winning combination is obtained when a combination of symbols called “comb” is arranged. The combination may be a combination of the same symbols or a combination including different symbols. The type of winning combination is determined according to the game state, but it can be roughly divided into a small role with payout of medals and a replay that can start the next game without the need to set the number of bets. There are a game combination and a special combination with a transition of the game state. Below, a small role and a re-playing role are collectively called a general role. In order for winning of each combination determined according to the gaming state to occur, it is necessary to win an internal lottery to be described later and set a winning flag of the combination in the RAM 41c.

  Of the winning flags for each of these combinations, the winning flag for the small role and the re-playing role is valid only in the game in which the flag is set, and is invalid in the next game. It is valid until the combination of combinations permitted by the flag is complete, and is invalid in a game having the combination of combinations permitted. In other words, once the winning flag for a special role is won, even if the combination of characters allowed by the flag cannot be aligned, the winning flag is not invalidated and is carried over to the next game. It becomes.

  As the role in this slot machine 1, as shown in FIG. 15, a regular bonus as a special role (hereinafter, regular bonus is RB), big bonus (1), (2) (hereinafter, big bonus is BB (1 ) And (2)) are defined as black watermelon, white watermelon, cherry, 1 bell as small roles, and replays (1) to (10) as replaying roles.

  Cherry is awarded when the symbol “Cherry” is derived on any of the winning lines for the right reel in any gaming state, and 6 medals are paid out. If the “Cherry” symbol stops at the upper or lower level of the right reel, the combination of cherries will be aligned with the two winning lines L2 and L5 or the winning lines L3 and L4. Since winning a cherry on the winning line, 12 medals will be paid out.

  Black watermelon is awarded when the combination of “black watermelon-black watermelon-black watermelon” is aligned on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, and 15 medals are paid out. The white watermelon is awarded when a combination of “white watermelon-black watermelon-black watermelon” is aligned on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, and 15 medals are paid out. One is awarded when one of the winning lines has a combination of “net 7-BAR-BAR” in any gaming state, and one medal is paid out. The bell is awarded when a combination of “bell-bell-bell” is arranged on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, and 15 medals are paid out.

  Replay (1) is awarded when a combination of “replay-replay-replay” is arranged on any of the winning lines in a gaming state other than RB. Replay (2) is awarded when a combination of “replay-bell-replay” is arranged on any of the winning lines in a gaming state other than RB. Replay (3) is awarded when a combination of “replay-replay-bell” is arranged on any of the winning lines in a gaming state other than RB.

  Replay (4) is awarded when a combination of “Cherry-Bell-Bell” is arranged on any of the winning lines in a gaming state other than RB. Replay (5) is awarded when a combination of “white 7-bell-bell” is aligned on any of the winning lines in a gaming state other than RB. Replay (6) is awarded when a combination of “black watermelon-bell-bell” is aligned on any of the winning lines in a gaming state other than RB. Replay (7) is awarded when a combination of “white watermelon-bell-bell” is arranged on any of the winning lines in a gaming state other than RB. Replay (8) is awarded when a combination of “Black 7-Replay-Replay” is aligned on any of the winning lines in a gaming state other than RB. Replay (9) is awarded when a combination of “net 7-replay-replay” is arranged on any of the winning lines in a gaming state other than RB. Replay (10) is awarded when a combination of “BAR-Replay-Replay” is arranged on any of the winning lines in a gaming state other than RB. When replays (1) to (10) win, there is no payout of medals, but the next game can be started without setting the number of bets again. This is essentially the same as a medal being paid out.

  RB is awarded when a combination of “net 7-net 7-black 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines in a gaming state other than RB, and the gaming state shifts to RB. The RB is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player over other gaming states by increasing the winning probability of the small role, particularly the bell, and when the 12 games are digested after the RB starts, or an 8-game winning ( When the type of a combination is allowed), it ends either whichever comes first.

  BB (1) is awarded when a combination of “black 7-black 7-black 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines in a gaming state other than RB. BB (2) wins when a combination of “network 7-network 7-network 7” is arranged on any of the winning lines in a gaming state other than RB.

  When BB (1) or BB (2) wins, the gaming state shifts to BB and simultaneously shifts to RB. When RB ends, if BB has not ended, it shifts to RB again, and BB It is controlled to RB repeatedly until the end. That is, during BB, it is always controlled to RB. Then, the BB ends when the total number of medals paid out to the player in the BB exceeds 300. At the end of the BB, the RB is also ended regardless of whether or not the RB end condition is satisfied.

  Hereinafter, the internal lottery of the present embodiment will be described. In the internal lottery, it is determined whether or not the above winning combination is permitted before the display results of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived and displayed (actually, when the start switch 7 is detected). To do. In the internal lottery, first, a random number for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 16383) is acquired as described later. Then, for each combination and combination of combinations determined according to whether the gaming state and special combination carry over, each combination determined according to the acquired random number for internal lottery, the gaming state, the number of bets and the set value And it is performed according to the judgment value number of the combination of the combination. In this embodiment, from the number of judgment values of each combination and combination of combinations, a range of determination values, a small combination and a special combination, or a replay combination and a special combination, each of which is selected by a special combination, a small combination, and a replay combination. The range of decision values to be won by overlapping, the range of decision values to be won by overlapping multiple types of small roles, and the range of decision values to be won by overlapping multiple types of re-game players are specified. Thus, winning in the internal lottery is not exclusive, and multiple types of winning combinations may be won simultaneously in one game. However, for special roles of different types, the range of determination values to be won in duplicate is not specified, and special types of different types are exclusively drawn.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17, a role and a role to be subject to internal lottery depending on whether the gaming state is the initial gaming state, RT (1), RT (2), or RB. The combination of is different. Furthermore, in the initial gaming state where the gaming state is RT (1), the combination of the combination and combination that is the subject of the internal lottery varies depending on whether or not the special combination is being carried over.

  When the gaming state is the initial gaming state and no special role is carried over, RB, BB (1), BB (2), RB + Replay (2), RB + Replay (3), RB + Cherry, RB + Cherry +1, BB (1) + Replay (2), BB (1) + Replay (3), BB (1) + Replay GR (5) (Replay (4) + Replay (5) + Replay (6) + Replay (7)), BB (1) + replay GR (4) (replay (1) + replay (8) + replay (9) + replay (10)), BB (1) + cherry, BB (1) + cherry +1 sheet, BB (2) + replay (2), BB (2) + replay (3), BB (2) + replay GR (5), BB (2) + replay GR (4), BB (2) + Cherry, BB (2) + cherry +1 sheet, replay (2), Replay (3), Replay GR (1) (Replay (1) + Replay (4) + Replay (5) + Replay (6) + Replay (7)), Replay GR (2) (Replay (1) ) + Replay (4) + Replay (5) + Replay (7)), Replay GR (3) (Replay (1) + Replay (4) + Replay (6) + Replay (7)), Replay GR (4) , Black watermelon + white watermelon, cherry, cherry + 1 sheet, bell are sequentially read out as the subject part of the internal lottery.

  In the state where the gaming state is the initial gaming state and any special role is carried over, replay (2), replay (3), replay GR (1), replay GR (2), replay GR (3), Replay GR (4), replay GR (5), black watermelon + white watermelon, cherry, cherry + 1 sheet, and bell are sequentially read out as the subject combination of the internal lottery.

  When the gaming state is RT (1) and no special role is carried over, RB, BB (1), BB (2), RB + Replay (2), RB + Replay (3), RB + Cherry, RB + Cherry + 1 sheet, BB (1) + Replay (2), BB (1) + Replay (3), BB (1) + Replay GR (5), BB (1) + Replay GR (4), BB (1) + Cherry, BB (1) + Cherry + 1 sheet, BB (2) + Replay (2), BB (2) + Replay (3), BB (2) + Replay GR (5), BB (2) + Replay GR (4), BB (2) + cherry, BB (2) + cherry +1 sheet, replay (1), replay GR (1), replay GR (2), replay GR (3), replay GR (4), replay GR (5), black watermelon + white watermelon, cheri , +1 cherry, bell is read out in the order as the target role of internal lottery.

  When the gaming state is RT (1) and any special role is carried over, replay (1), replay (2), replay (3), replay GR (1), replay GR (2), Replay GR (3), replay GR (4), replay GR (5), black watermelon + white watermelon, cherry, cherry + 1 sheet, and bell are sequentially read out as the subject combination of the internal lottery.

  When the gaming state is RT (2), RB, BB (1), BB (2), RB + Replay (2), RB + Replay (3), RB + Cherry, RB + Cherry + 1, BB (1) + Replay (2) , BB (1) + Replay (3), BB (1) + Replay GR (5), BB (1) + Replay GR (4), BB (1) + Cherry, BB (1) + Cherry + 1 sheet, BB (2) + Replay (2), BB (2) + Replay (3), BB (2) + Replay GR (5), BB (2) + Replay GR (4), BB (2) + Cherry, BB ( 2) + Cherry + 1 sheet, Replay (1), Replay (2), Replay (3), Black watermelon + White watermelon, Cherry, Cherry + 1 sheet, and Bell are sequentially read out as the internal lottery target roles.

  When the gaming state is RB, black watermelon + white watermelon, cherry, cherry + 1 sheet, and bell are sequentially read out as a target combination for internal lottery.

  In the internal lottery, when the combination or combination of roles that are the targets of the internal lottery and the number of judgment values determined corresponding to the current gaming state are sequentially added to the random number for internal lottery, and the result of the addition overflows It is determined that the combination or combination of combinations is won.

  If a winning combination of any combination or combination of combinations is determined, a winning flag corresponding to the combination of combination or combination determined to be winning is set in the internal winning flag storage work assigned to the RAM 41c. The internal winning flag storage work consists of a 2-byte storage area, of which the upper byte is assigned as the special role storing work in which the winning flag for the special role is set, and the lower byte is the winning of the general role It is assigned as a general role storage work for which a flag is set. Specifically, when a special combination is won, a special combination winning flag indicating that the special combination is won is set in the special combination storing work, and the winning flag set in the general combination storing work is cleared. In addition, when a special role + general role is won, a special role winning flag indicating that the special role is won is set in the special role storage work, and a general role winning indicating that the general role is won Set the flag in the general role storage work. When a general combination is won, a winning flag for the general combination indicating that the general combination is won is set in the general combination storing work. If no winning combination is selected, only the general winning combination work is cleared.

  Next, stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R will be described.

  The main CPU 41a refers to the table index and the table creation data stored in the ROM 41b when the rotation of the reel starts and when the reel stops and the reel that is still rotating still remains. Create a stop control table for each reel. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected, the stop control table of the corresponding reel is referred to and the slip of the referred stop control table is referred to. Based on the number of frames, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  In the table index, an index that indicates the start address of the area in which the data for table creation is stored, from the reference address when referring to the table index, according to the setting state of the winning flag by internal lottery (hereinafter referred to as the internal winning state) Differences up to the address where the data is stored are registered. As a result, a difference corresponding to the internal winning state is acquired, and the corresponding index data can be acquired by adding the difference to the reference address. Note that even if the winning status of the combination is different, the same control is applied (for example, when BB (1) + replay (2) is won and when BB (2) + replay (2) is won The same address is stored as the index data, and in such a case, the stop control table is created by referring to the same table creation data. Become.

  The table creation data includes a stop control table indicating the number of sliding frames according to the stop operation position, and an address of the stop control table to be referred to according to the reel stop status.

  The stop control table referred to according to the reel stop status is whether all reels are rotating, only the left reel is stopped, only the middle reel is stopped, only the right reel is stopped, It may vary depending on whether the middle reel is stopped, the left and right reels are stopped, the middle and right reels are stopped, and if any reel is stopped, stop Since there may be differences depending on the stop position of the reels already completed, the address of the stop control table to be referenced for each situation is registered for each rotating reel, and based on the top address of the table creation data, It is possible to specify the address of the stop control table that should be referred to according to the status of the system. And to be able to identify the stop control table. Even when the reel stop status and the stopped position of the stopped reel are different, when the same stop control table is applied, the same address may be registered as the address of the stop control table. In such a case, the same stop control table is referred to.

  The stop control table is data that can specify the number of sliding frames for each timing when the stop operation is performed. In this embodiment, stepping motors that make one turn at a cycle of 168 steps (0 to 167) are used for the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. That is, when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are driven for 168 steps, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R make one round. Then, 21 areas (frames) divided every 16 steps (number of steps in which one symbol moves) are defined for one reel, and these areas are areas 1 to 21 from the reel reference position. A number is assigned. On the other hand, the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 21, and symbol numbers 1 to 21 from the reel reference position are assigned to symbols on each reel, so symbols 1 to 21 are assigned to each reel. , Area numbers 1 to 21 are assigned in order. In the stop control table, the number of sliding symbols for each area number is compressed and stored according to a predetermined rule, and the number of sliding symbols for each area number can be acquired by expanding the stop control table. Yes.

  As described above, the stop control table created by referring to the table index and the table creation data corresponds to the area number, and the area corresponding to each area number is the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the perspective window 3). Sliding frame when an operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected at a timing (a timing in which the number of steps from the reel reference position is included in the range of the number of steps of each region number). It is a table with each number set.

  Next, the procedure for creating the stop control table will be described. First, at the start of reel rotation, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game is acquired. Specifically, the table index is first referred to, index data corresponding to the internal winning state is obtained, table creation data is identified based on the obtained index data, and all reels are identified from the identified table creation data. The address of the stop control table for each reel corresponding to the state of rotation is acquired, and the stop control table for each reel stored at the acquired address is expanded to generate a stop control table for all reels.

  Further, when any one reel stops or any two reels stop, the index data acquired at the start of reel rotation, that is, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game The table creation data is identified based on the table creation data, and the stop control table address of the unreacted reel corresponding to the stopped reel and the area number of the stop position of the reel is obtained from the identified table creation data. The stop control table for each stored reel is expanded to create a stop control table for the unstopped reels.

  Next, when the main CPU 41a effectively detects any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel, the control when the display result is derived to the corresponding reel will be described. When one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected, the stop operation position area is determined based on the number of steps from the reel reference position when the stop operation is detected. The number is specified, the stop control table of the reel where the stop operation is detected is referred to, and the number of sliding symbols corresponding to the area number of the specified stop operation position is acquired. Then, control is performed to rotate and stop the reel by the number of acquired sliding frames. Specifically, from the number of steps from the reel reference position at the time when the stop operation is detected, the number of steps from the acquired number of sliding frames to the stop is calculated, and the reel is rotated and stopped by the calculated number of steps. Take control. As a result, the area corresponding to the area number that is the stop position ahead of the number of sliding frames from the area corresponding to the area number of the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected is the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the perspective window 3 It will stop in the lower symbol area).

  In the table index of this embodiment, only one address is stored as index data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state, and further, one table creation data includes one reel. Only one address is stored as the address of the storage area of the stop control table corresponding to the stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). In other words, table creation data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state and stop control table corresponding to the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are uniquely determined. The stop control table created with reference to is unique for one internal winning state in one gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). Therefore, when all of the gaming state, the internal winning state, and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are the same, the reel is based on the same stop control table, that is, the same control pattern. The stop control is performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, a value of 0 to 4 is determined as the number of sliding frames, and the reel can be stopped by drawing a maximum of 4 symbols after detecting the stop operation. In other words, the stop position of the symbol can be designated from a range of a maximum of 5 frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. In addition, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the reel for one symbol, it is possible to stop the reel by pulling in a maximum of four symbols after detecting the stop operation. The symbol stop position can be designated from a range of up to five symbols including the operation position.

  In this embodiment, when any of the winning combinations is won, the winning combination is drawn to the maximum in the range of 4 frames on the winning line, and the non-winning winning combination is drawn so that it is not aligned on the winning line. A stop control table with a defined number of frames is created and reel stop control is performed. If no winning combination is selected, a stop control table with a determined number of sliding symbols that do not have any combination And stop control of the reel. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, if the winning combination can be stopped on the winning line in the drawing range of up to 4 frames, the control is performed so that the winning combination is stopped. The combination that has not been performed will be controlled to be stopped in a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames.

  When a special role is elected while the special role has been carried over from before the previous game, or when a special role and a small role are simultaneously won, such as when a special role and a small role are simultaneously won (BB (1 ) + Cherry, BB (1) + Bell, etc.), the number of sliding symbols is set so that the winning small role is drawn to the maximum in the range of 4 frames in the winning line, and the winning small role is won For stop operation positions that cannot be drawn into the line in the range of up to 4 frames, a stop control table is created in which the number of sliding frames is determined so that the winning special role is drawn into the winning line in the range of 4 frames, The reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, if it is possible to stop all the small roles that have been selected in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line and stop them, control is performed so that the winning combination is stopped. If you can't draw a small role that has been won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the line, if you can stop with a special role that has been won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line, A control is performed to stop them in a uniform manner, and a winning combination that has not been won will be controlled to be stopped within a 4-frame pull-in range. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the small combination on the winning line over the special combination, and the special combination can be won only when the small combination cannot be drawn. When a special combination and a small combination can be withdrawn at the same time, only the small combination is drawn in, and the small combination is not aligned on the winning line at the same time as the special combination.

  In this example, when a special role is elected while the special role has been carried over from before the previous game, or when a special role and a small role are simultaneously elected, the special role and the small role are won simultaneously. If the selected special role is given priority over the selected special role, the special role is controlled on the winning line only when the small role cannot be withdrawn. When winning simultaneously, priority is given to the control for aligning the special role on the winning line over the small role, and the control for aligning the small role on the winning line may be performed only when the special role cannot be drawn.

  When a special role and a re-playing role are won at the same time, such as when a re-playing role is won while the special role has been carried over from before the previous game, or when a special role and a re-playing role are won simultaneously (BB ( 1) + Replay (2), etc.), when a stop operation is performed, control is performed so that the symbols of the re-gamer are aligned and stopped on the winning line within a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames. In this case, the symbols constituting the re-gamer or the symbols constituting the re-gamer to be simultaneously elected are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols or less, that is, within 4 frames, for any of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Since it can always be stopped at any position within the 4-frame pull-in range, if the special combination and the re-playing combination are elected at the same time, the timing of the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R by the player Without fail, the re-playing role will always be won. That is, in such a case, the control for aligning the re-games on the winning line has priority over the special game, and the re-games will always win. In the case where the special combination and the re-playing combination can be withdrawn at the same time, only the re-playing combination is drawn in, and the special combination is not arranged on the winning line at the same time as the re-playing combination.

  When multiple types of re-playing roles are won at the same time (replay GR (1) to (5) (the same applies when winning simultaneously with special roles)), as shown in FIG. Replays determined according to the group of replaying players who have been elected at the same time among the gamers and whether the first reel (first stop reel) is the left reel, middle reel, or right reel Control is performed in which a combination is stopped on the winning line within a maximum of 4 frames.

  If Replay GR (1) (Replay (1) + Replay (4) + Replay (5) + Replay (6) + Replay (7)) is won and the left reel is set to the first stop, Control is performed so that the combination of replays (4) to (7) in the game combination is aligned with any winning line and stopped. As shown in FIG. 3, “cherry” constituting the replay (4), “white 7” constituting the replay (5), “black watermelon” constituting the replay (6), “replay (7) constituting“ The “white watermelon” is arranged at intervals of 4 frames or less on the left reel, and the “bells” constituting the replays (4) to (7) are arranged at intervals of 4 frames or less on the middle and right reels. Therefore, when the replay GR (1) is won and the left reel is set to the first stop, any of the replays (4) to (7) is performed regardless of the timing when the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated. Kaga is sure to win.

  On the other hand, when the replay GR (1) is won and the middle reel or the right reel is set to the first stop, the combination of the replay (1) among the selected replay players is aligned on any winning line and stopped. To control. As shown in FIG. 3, since “Replay” is arranged at intervals of 4 frames or less on all reels, when Replay GR (1) is won and the middle reel or the right reel is set to the first stop, Regardless of the timing at which the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated, the replay (1) always wins.

  If Replay GR (2) (Replay (1) + Replay (4) + Replay (5) + Replay (7)) is won and the middle reel is set to the first stop, the replay among the replayed players who have won (4) Control to stop the combination of (5) and (7) in line with any winning line. As shown in FIG. 3, the “cherry” constituting the replay (4), the “white 7” constituting the replay (5), and the “white watermelon” constituting the replay (7) are within 4 frames in the left reel. Since the “bells” that make up the replays (4), (5), and (7) are arranged at intervals of 4 frames or less on the middle and right reels, the replay GR (2) is selected. However, when the middle reel is set to the first stop, one of the replays (4), (5), and (7) always wins regardless of the timing when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated. ing.

  On the other hand, when the replay GR (2) is won and the left reel or the right reel is set to the first stop, the combination of the replay (1) among the selected replay players is aligned on any winning line and stopped. To control. As shown in FIG. 3, since “Replay” is arranged at intervals of 4 frames or less on all reels, when Replay GR (2) is selected and the left reel or the right reel is set to the first stop, Regardless of the timing at which the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, the replay (1) always wins.

  If Replay GR (3) (Replay (1) + Replay (4) + Replay (6) + Replay (7)) is won and the right reel is set to the first stop, the replay among the replayed players won (4) Control to stop the combination of (6) and (7) in line with any winning line. As shown in FIG. 3, the “cherry” constituting the replay (4), the “black watermelon” constituting the replay (6), and the “white watermelon” constituting the replay (7) are within 4 frames in the left reel. Since the “bells” that make up the replays (4), (6), and (7) are arranged at intervals of 4 frames or less on the middle and right reels, the replay GR (3) is selected. When the right reel is set to the first stop, one of the replays (4), (6), and (7) always wins regardless of the timing when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated. ing.

  On the other hand, when the replay GR (3) is won and the left reel or the middle reel is set to the first stop, the combination of the replay (1) among the selected replay players is aligned on any winning line and stopped. To control. As shown in FIG. 3, since “replay” is arranged at intervals of 4 frames or less on all reels, when the replay GR (3) is won and the left reel or the middle reel is set to the first stop, Regardless of the timing at which the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, the replay (1) always wins.

  If Replay GR (4) (Replay (1) + Replay (8) + Replay (9) + Replay (10)) is won, a maximum of 4 frames will be drawn on the winning line when the stop operation is performed If the combination of replays (8) to (10) among the re-playing players who have been selected in the range can be stopped, the control is performed so that they are stopped together. In the case where the combination of replays (8) to (10) cannot be drawn out of the selected re-game players, control is performed so that the replay (1) is aligned and stopped within the maximum four-frame drawing range on the winning line. As shown in FIG. 3, “Black 7” constituting Replay (8), “Net 7” constituting Replay (9), and “BAR” constituting Replay (10) are stopped on any winning line. Stop positions are arranged at intervals of 4 frames or less on the left reel, and “replays” constituting replays (8) to (10) are arranged at intervals of 4 frames or less on the middle reel. Therefore, when the replay GR (4) is won and the left reel is set to the first stop, any of the replays (8) to (10) is performed regardless of the timing at which the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated. Kaga is sure to win.

  On the other hand, the stop position where “Black 7” constituting Replay (8), “Net 7” constituting Replay (9), and “BAR” constituting Replay (10) stop on any winning line is Although these “black 7”, “net 7”, and “BAR” are arranged with more than 4 frames on the left reel, they are arranged at intervals of 4 frames or less on the left reel. When the right reel is set to the first stop, a winning line in which the combinations of replays (8) to (10) can be arranged is limited. Therefore, when the middle reel is set to the first stop, the middle reel or In the right reel, the winning line where “Replay” is stopped is selected as “Black 7” constituting Replay (8), “Net 7” constituting Replay (9), or “BAR” constituting Replay (10). Can be pulled in up to 4 frames Replays (8) to (10) win on the condition that the stop operation is performed at imming, and replays (8) to (10) win if the stop operation is made at other timings. There is no. In this case, replay (1) is always won.

  When replay GR (5) (replay (4) + replay (5) + replay (6) + replay (7)) is won, regardless of which reel the first stop reel is, replay (4) Control is performed so that the combinations of (7) to (7) are aligned with any winning line and stopped. As shown in FIG. 3, “cherry” constituting the replay (4), “white 7” constituting the replay (5), “black watermelon” constituting the replay (6), “replay (7) constituting“ The “white watermelon” is arranged at intervals of 4 frames or less on the left reel, and the “bells” constituting the replays (4) to (7) are arranged at intervals of 4 frames or less on the middle and right reels. Therefore, when replay GR (5) is won, any one of replays (4) to (7) is always won regardless of the timing when the first stop reel and stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated. It is supposed to be.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the replay GR (1) to (3) is won, it is possible to win both the replay (1) and the replay (4) to (7). Depending on whether GR (1) has been won, Replay GR (2) has been won, or Replay GR (3) has been won, the first stop reel that is the winning condition for replays (4) to (7) differs. If the first stop reels, which are the winning conditions for replays (4) to (7), match, replays (4) to (7) win, but if they do not match, replay (1) wins. It becomes.

  When replay GR (4) is won, replay (8) to (10) wins preferentially, and when replay (8) to (10) cannot be won, replay (1 However, if the left reel is the first stop reel, any one of the replays (8) to (10) can be won.

  When the replay GR (5) is won, the replays (4) to (7) are always won regardless of the timing of the stop operation and which reel the first stop reel is.

  In this embodiment, after the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started, the main CPU 41a continues to rotate the reels for which the stop operation has not been detected until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected. On the condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected, control is performed to stop the display result on the corresponding reel. Even if the reel rotation temporarily stops due to the occurrence of a reel rotation error, the stop operation is still detected until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected after the reel rotation is restarted. Control is performed to stop the display result of the corresponding reels on the condition that the rotation of the reels that have not been continued is continued and the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected.

  In this embodiment, control is performed to stop the display result on the corresponding reel on condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected. However, the rotation of the reel is started. When a predetermined automatic stop time has elapsed, even if the reel stop operation is not performed, it is assumed that the stop operation has been performed, and automatic stop control is performed to automatically stop each reel. May be. In this case, since the reels are stopped without the player's operation, it is preferable to derive a display result that does not constitute any combination even if any combination is won.

  In the conventional slot machine, the reel stop control pattern used when the small combination is selected independently and the reel stop control pattern used when the small combination and special combination are simultaneously selected are different from each other. Although the winning of the special role can be determined accordingly, it did not suggest any information other than the winning of the special role depending on the stop mode of the reel. In addition, in the conventional slot machine, since the stop mode at the time of winning a small role alone is different from the stop mode at the time of simultaneous winning of a small role and a special role, is the special role won according to the stop mode? If the player is able to determine whether or not he / she has not won the special role, there is a problem that the expectation is lost.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, cherry, RB + cherry, BB (1) + cherry, BB (2) + cherry, cherry + 1 sheet, RB + cherry + 1 sheet, BB (1) + cherry + 1 sheet, BB (2) + cherry + 1 When the right reel is stopped at the stop operation position where the “Cherry” symbol is drawn on the winning line, the “Cherry” symbol is stopped on the right reel winning line. Control is performed, but if Cherry, RB + Cherry, BB (1) + Cherry, BB (2) + Cherry is selected, the “Cherry” symbol on the right reel can be stopped on the winning line Among the stop operation positions, the “cherry” symbol can be stopped only at the upper and lower stages, and can be stopped at any of the upper, middle, and lower stages. When the stop operation is performed at the correct stop operation position, the “cherry” symbol is controlled to stop at the upper or lower stage of the right reel, whereas cherry + 1, RB + cherry + 1, and BB (1) + When “Cherry + 1” and BB (2) + Cherry + 1 are selected, the “Cherry” symbol is selected from the stop operation positions where the “Cherry” symbol can be stopped on the winning line on the right reel. When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position that can be aligned to any of the upper, middle, and lower stages, control is performed to stop the `` cherry '' symbol in the middle part of the right reel, and the `` cherry '' symbol is It is possible to align only to the lower stage, and control to align the “Cherry” pattern to the upper and lower stages of the right reel only when a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position that cannot be aligned to the middle stage. It has become Migihitsuji.

  In other words, Cherry, RB + Cherry, BB (1) + Cherry, BB (2) + Cherry are selected, and the “Cherry” symbol is stopped at the stop operation position where it can be stopped on the winning line of the right reel. When “Cherry” is made, control is performed to stop the “Cherry” symbol in the upper and lower stages, and +1 cherry, RB + cherry + 1, BB (1) + cherry + 1, and BB (2) + cherry + 1 are selected. When the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the “Cherry” symbol can be stopped on the winning line of the right reel, the “Cherry” symbol is stopped in preference to the upper and lower tiers. It comes to perform control.

  For this reason, as shown in FIG. 19 (a), when cherry, RB + cherry, BB (1) + cherry, BB (2) + cherry is won, the “cherry” symbol on the right reel Stopping only at the bottom, if cherry + 1 sheet, RB + cherry + 1 sheet, BB (1) + cherry + 1 sheet, BB (2) + cherry + 1 sheet are selected, the “cherry” symbol is displayed in the middle on the right reel Likely to stop. In other words, when Cherry, RB + Cherry, BB (1) + Cherry, BB (2) + Cherry wins, Cherry wins, +1 Cherry, RB + Cherry + 1, BB (1) + Cherry + 1 The position where the “cherry” symbol is likely to stop on the right reel differs from the case where a cherry wins when BB (2) + cherry + 1 is selected.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 19 (a) and 19 (b)-(1), in the internal lottery, the winning probabilities of cherry, RB + cherry, BB (1) + cherry, BB (2) + cherry are combined. RB + Cherry, BB (1) + Cherry, BB (2) + Cherry Probability Combined Value (A + C + E) in the value (A + C + E + G) +1 Cherry, RB + Cherry + 1, BB (1) + Cherry +1, BB (2) + cherry + 1 winning probability (B + D + F + H) RB + cherry +1, BB (1) + cherry +1, BB (2) + cherry + 1 winning probability Cherries, RB + Cherry, BB (1) + Cherry, BB (2) + Cherry, Cherry + 1, RB + Cherry + 1 , BB (1) + +1 cherry, are doing the BB (2) + Cherry +1 piece of lottery.

  As a result, RB, BB (1) or BB (2), that is, a special role is better when one cherry and one cherry are elected at the same time than when one cherry is elected alone. Since the percentage of winning at the same time will increase, depending on whether the position where the “cherry” symbol stops on the right reel is in the upper, lower, or middle stage, the player's expectation for winning the special role You can make changes.

  Furthermore, it is suggested that a special role may have been won in the right reel, regardless of whether the “cherry” symbol on the right reel is in the upper, lower or middle tier. It is impossible to determine whether or not a special role is won from the position where the symbol stops. Even if the “Cherry” symbol stops on the upper, middle, or lower row on the right reel, the special role is won. The player's expectation for what is being done is not impaired.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B, the combined value of the winning probabilities of RB + cherry, BB (1) + cherry, BB (2) + cherry in the internal lottery. BB (1) + cherry + BB (1) + cherry + BB (1) + cherry + BB (1) + BB (1) + cherry + BB (1) + cherry + BB RB + Cherry with the probability that the sum of the winning probability (D + F) of BB (1) + Cherry + 1, BB (2) + Cherry + 1 will occupy the combined value (B + D + F) of the winning probability of Cherry + 1 BB (1) + cherry, BB (2) + cherry, RB + cherry + 1 sheet, BB (1) + cherry + 1 sheet, BB (2) + cherry + 1 sheet.

  As a result, BB (1) and BB (2), that is, RB more when cherries and one piece are won at the same time than when cherries and one piece are won alone. Since the ratio of winning at the same time as special roles that can be expected to win medals will increase, RB, depending on whether the position where the “Cherry” symbol stops on the right reel is the upper, lower or middle It is possible to change the player's expectation for winning of BB (1) and BB (2), which are more advantageous among BB (1) and BB (2).

  Furthermore, it is impossible to determine whether the RB is won from the position where the “cherry” symbol is stopped on the right reel or whether BB (1) and BB (2) are won. Regardless of whether the “Cherry” symbols are in the upper, middle, or lower tiers, the player ’s choice for winning BB (1) and BB (2), which is more advantageous among RB, BB (1) and BB (2) Expectation is not lost.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B, in the internal lottery, cherry, cherry + 1, RB + cherry, RB + cherry + 1 when the set value is 1 to 3 Sheets, BB (1) + cherry, BB (2) + cherry, BB (1) + cherry + 1 sheet, BB (2) + cherry + 1 sheet winning probability (A1 + B1 + C1 + D1 + E1 + F1 + G1 + H1) +1 cherry, RB + cherry +1, BB (1) + cherry + 1, BB (2) + cherry + 1 , RB + cherry + 1 sheet, BB (1) + cherry, BB (2) + cherry, BB (1) + cherry + 1 sheet, BB ( ) + Cherry + 1 winning probability total value (A2 + B2 + C2 + D2 + E2 + F2 + G2 + H2) of Cherry + 1, RB + Cherry + 1, BB (1) + Cherry + 1, BB (2) + Cherry + 1 winning probability (B2 + D2 + F2 + H2) ) Ratio of cherries, cherries + 1, RB + cherry, RB + cherries + 1, BB (1) + cherry, BB (2) + cherry, BB (1) + cherry + 1, BB (2) A lottery of + cherry + one piece is held.

  As a result, the setting values 4 to 6, that is, the settings 1 to 3, are set in the case where the cherry and one of the cherries are elected at the same time, rather than the case where the cherry and the one are elected simultaneously. This means that the percentage of setting values that are more advantageous to the player than the case where the “Cherry” symbol is stopped on the right reel is higher, lower, or middle. Thus, it can be estimated whether or not the set value is a set value advantageous to the player.

  Furthermore, it is impossible to determine whether the settings 1 to 3 or the settings 4 to 6 are set as the setting values from the position where the “cherry” symbol stops on the right reel. Regardless of whether the “cherry” symbols are arranged in the upper, middle, or lower stages, the player's sense of expectation that settings 4 to 6 having higher advantages among the settings 1 to 6 are set is impaired. There is nothing.

  In this embodiment, in the internal lottery, cherry, cherry + 1, RB + cherry, RB + cherry + 1, BB (1) + cherry, BB (2) + cherry, BB (1) + cherry + 1, BB (2 ) + Cherry + 1 lottery, RB + cherry, RB + cherry + 1 sheet, BB (1) + cherry, BB (2) + cherry, BB (1) + cherry + 1 sheet, BB (2) + cherry If only +1 is selected as a lottery target and cherries and cherries +1 are selected, RB, BB (1) or BB (2) may always be selected simultaneously.

  Further, in this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of special roles to be won simultaneously with cherry and cherry + 1, but it is also possible to have a configuration in which only one type of special roles is picked simultaneously with cherry, cherry + 1.

  Further, in this embodiment, cherry, RB + cherry, BB (1) + cherry, BB (2) + cherry are selected and stopped at the stop operation position where the “cherry” symbol can be stopped on the right reel. When the operation is performed, the “Cherry” symbol stops only in the upper and lower tiers, and +1 cherry, RB + cherry + 1, BB (1) + cherry + 1, BB (2) + cherry + 1 When the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the “cherry” symbol can be stopped on the right reel, the “cherry” symbol is easy to stop in the middle stage, but cherry, RB + cherry, BB ( 1) + Cherry, BB (2) + Cherry is elected, Cherry + 1 sheet, RB + Cherry + 1 sheet, BB (1) + Cherry + 1 sheet, BB (2) + Cherry It is sufficient that the position where it is easy to stop differs depending on whether +1 is selected, for example, it is easy to stop at a specific position among the upper, middle, and lower stages in one case, and a specific position in the other case It may be configured to easily stop at a different position.

  Further, in this embodiment, cherry, RB + cherry, BB (1) + cherry, BB (2) + cherry are selected and stopped at the stop operation position where the “cherry” symbol can be stopped on the right reel. When an operation is performed, control is performed to stop the “cherry” symbols only in the upper and lower stages, and cherry + 1 sheet, RB + cherry + 1 sheet, BB (1) + cherry + 1 sheet, BB (2) + cherry + 1 sheet When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the “cherry” symbol can be stopped on the right reel, control is performed so that the “cherry” symbol is aligned at a higher rate than the upper and lower tiers. However, Cherry, RB + Cherry, BB (1) + Cherry, BB (2) + Cherry are selected and the “Cherry” symbol is stopped on the right reel. When the stop operation is performed at a stop operation position that can be operated, control is performed so that the “cherry” symbols are aligned at the upper and lower stages at a higher rate than the middle stage, or cherry + 1 sheet, RB + cherry + 1 sheet, BB When (1) + cherry + 1 and BB (2) + cherry + 1 are selected and the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the “cherry” symbol can be stopped on the right reel, Control may be performed so that the symbols are aligned only in the middle stage.

  In this embodiment, in the internal lottery, RB + cherry, BB (1) + cherry, BB (2) occupying the total value of the winning probabilities of cherry, RB + cherry, BB (1) + cherry, BB (2) + cherry. + Relative value ratio of winning probability of cherry and +1 cherry, RB + cherry + 1, BB (1) + cherry + 1, BB (2) + cherry + 1 , BB (1) + Cherry + 1, BB (2) + Cherry + 1, and the ratio of the combined value of winning probabilities is different, Cherry, RB + Cherry, BB (1) + Cherry, BB (2) + Cherries, cherries +1, RB + cherries +1, BB (1) + cherries +1, BB (2) + cherries +1, lottery, cherries, RB + cherries, BB (1) Cherry, BB (2) + Cherry is elected, and when the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the “Cherry” symbol can be stopped on the right reel, Cherry + 1 sheet, RB + Cherry + 1 sheet, BB (1) + Cherry + 1 sheet, BB (2) + Cherry + 1 sheet is selected, and priority is given to when the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the “Cherry” symbol can be stopped on the right reel. By controlling the stop position to be different, the player's expectation for winning the special role can be changed depending on the position where the “cherry” symbol is stopped on the right reel. However, in the internal lottery, the winning probability of cherry, RB + cherry + 1, BB (1) + cherry + 1, BB (2) + cherry + 1 RB + Cherry + 1 sheet, BB (1) + Cherry + 1 sheet, BB (2) + Cherry + 1 winning probability ratio, Cherry + 1 sheet, RB + Cherry, BB (1) + Cherry, BB ( 2) RB + Cherry, BB (1) + Cherry, BB (2) + Cherry's winning probability combined in the combined value of the winning probability of Cherry, Cherry, RB + Cherry, BB ( 1) + cherry, BB (2) + cherry, cherry +1, RB + cherry +1, BB (1) + cherry +1, BB (2) + cherry +1, lottery, cherry, RB + cherry +1, BB (1) + cherry + 1 sheet, BB (2) + cherry + 1 sheet are selected, and stop operation is possible at the stop operation position where the “cherry” symbol can be stopped on the right reel. In the stop operation position where the “Cherry” symbol can be stopped on the right reel, when “Cherry + 1”, RB + Cherry, BB (1) + Cherry, BB (2) + Cherry are selected. By controlling the stop position to be different depending on when the stop operation is performed, the player's expectation for winning the special role changes depending on the position at which the `` cherry '' symbol stops on the right reel You may make it have.

  Also, in the internal lottery, RB + Cherry, BB (1) + Cherry + 1, BB (2) occupying the total value of winning probabilities of Cherry, RB + Cherry, BB (1) + Cherry + 1, BB (2) + Cherry + 1 ) + Cherry + 1 winning probability ratio and cherry + 1 RB + cherry +1, BB (1) + cherry, BB (2) + cherry RB occupying the winning probability +1 BB (1) + Cherry, BB (2) + Cherry's combined probability of winning value is different in probability, Cherry, RB + Cherry, BB (1) + Cherry, BB (2) + Cherry, Cherry + 1 RB + cherry + 1 sheet, BB (1) + cherry + 1 sheet, BB (2) + cherry + 1 sheet lottery, cherry, RB + cherry, BB (1) + cherry + 1 , BB (2) + Cherry + 1 is selected, and when the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the “Cherry” symbol can be stopped on the right reel, Cherry + 1 and RB + Cherry + 1 BB (1) + Cherry and BB (2) + Cherry are selected, and when the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the “Cherry” symbol can be stopped on the right reel, the stop is given priority. By controlling the positions to be different, the player's expectation for winning the special role may be changed depending on the position where the “cherry” symbol is stopped on the right reel.

  In addition, in the internal lottery, RB + cherry + 1 sheet, BB (1) + cherry, BB (2) +, RB + cherry + 1 sheet occupying the total value of winning probability of cherry, RB + cherry + 1 sheet, BB (1) + cherry, BB (2) + cherry Ratio of winning value of cherry winning probability and RB + cherry, BB (1) in the winning value of cherry + 1, RB + cherry, BB (1) + cherry + 1, BB (2) + cherry + 1 winning probability + Cherry + 1 sheet, BB (2) + Cherry + 1 sheet winning probability combined ratio of cherry, RB + cherry, BB (1) + cherry, BB (2) + cherry, cherry + 1 RB + cherry + 1 sheet, BB (1) + cherry + 1 sheet, BB (2) + cherry + 1 sheet lottery, cherry, RB + cherry + 1 sheet, BB (1) + celli , BB (2) + Cherry has been won, and when the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the “Cherry” symbol can be stopped on the right reel, Cherry + 1, RB + Cherry, BB (1) + Cherry + 1, BB (2) + Cherry + 1 are selected, and stop when the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the “Cherry” symbol can be stopped on the right reel. By controlling the positions to be different, the player's expectation for winning the special role may be changed depending on the position where the “cherry” symbol is stopped on the right reel.

  Further, in this embodiment, the winning probability of BB (1) + cherry, BB (2) + cherry in the combined value of the winning probability of RB + cherry, BB (1) + cherry, BB (2) + cherry in the internal lottery. BB (1) + Cherry + 1, BB (2) in the combined value of the winning probability of RB + Cherry + 1, BB (1) + Cherry + 1, BB (2) + Cherry + 1 RB + cherry, BB (1) + cherry, BB (2) + cherry, RB + cherry +1, BB (1) + cherry +1, BB (2) + cherry + 1 lottery, RB + cherry, BB (1) + cherry, BB (2) + cherry are selected, and it is possible to stop the “cherry” symbol on the right reel When the stop operation is performed at the correct stop operation position, RB + Cherry + 1 sheet, BB (1) + Cherry + 1 sheet, BB (2) + Cherry + 1 sheet are selected, and the "Cherry" symbol is stopped on the right reel By controlling so that the stop position is preferentially different from the case where the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the “cherry” symbol is stopped on the right reel, RB and BB are controlled. In the internal lottery, the player's expectation for winning BB (1) and BB (2), which are more advantageous among (1) and BB (2), can be changed. RB (Cherry), BB (1) + Cherry + 1 sheet, BB (2) + Cherry + 1 sheet of BB (1) + Cherry + 1 sheet, BB (2) + Cherry + 1 sheet BB (1) + Cherry, BB (2) + Cherry wins as a percentage of the winning probabilities and RB + Cherry + 1, BB (1) + Cherry, BB (2) + Cherry winning probabilities RB + Cherry, BB (1) + Cherry, BB (2) + Cherry, RB + Cherry + 1, BB (1) + Cherry + 1, BB (2) + Cherry +1 lottery, RB + Cherry, BB (1) + Cherry + 1, BB (2) + Cherry + 1 won, and a stop operation position that can stop the “Cherry” symbol on the right reel RB + cherry + 1 sheet, BB (1) + cherry, BB (2) + cherry are won, and it is possible to stop the “cherry” symbol on the right reel. By controlling so that the stop position is preferentially different from the case where the stop operation is performed at the correct stop operation position, RB, BB (1) and A change may be made to the player's expectation for winning of BB (1) and BB (2), which are more advantageous among BB (2).

  Further, in this embodiment, in the internal lottery, cherry, cherry + 1, RB + cherry, RB + cherry + 1, BB (1) + cherry, BB (2) + cherry, BB ( 1) + cherry + 1 sheet, BB (2) + cherry + 1 sheet of cherries occupying the total value of winning probabilities, RB + cherry + 1 sheet, BB (1) + cherry + 1 sheet, BB (2) + cherry + 1 sheet Cherry, Cherry + 1, RB + Cherry, RB + Cherry + 1, BB (1) + Cherry, BB (2) + Cherry, BB (1) when the set value is 4-6 rather than the ratio of the winning probability sum + Cherry +1, BB (2) + Cherry +1 cherries occupying the combined value of winning probabilities +1, RB + Cherry +1, BB (1) + Cherry +1, BB (2 + Cherries + Cherry + Cherry + 1 sheet, RB + Cherry, RB + Cherry + 1 sheet, BB (1) + Cherry, BB (2) + Cherry, BB (1) + Cherry + 1, BB (2) + Cherry + 1 lottery, Cherry, RB + Cherry, BB (1) + Cherry, BB (2) + Cherry are selected, and the “Cherry” symbol on the right reel When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position that can be stopped, Cherry +1 sheet, RB + Cherry +1 sheet, BB (1) + Cherry +1 sheet, BB (2) + Cherry +1 sheet are selected, Control is performed so that the position where the “cherry” symbol is stopped at the right reel is stopped at a stop operation position where the “cherry” symbol can be stopped is different from the position where the stop is prioritized. In the right reel, it is possible to infer whether or not the set value is advantageous to the player by the difference in the position where the “cherry” symbol is stopped. When the value is 1 to 3, cherry, cherry + 1, RB + cherry, RB + cherry + 1, BB (1) + cherry, BB (2) + cherry, BB (1) + cherry + 1, BB (2) + Cherry, cherries in the case where the set value is 4-6 rather than the ratio of the sum of the winning probabilities of cherry, RB + cherry, BB (1) + cherry, BB (2) + cherry in the combined probability of the winning probability of one cherry Cherry + 1 sheet, RB + Cherry, RB + Cherry + 1 sheet, BB (1) + Cherry, BB (2) + Cherry, BB (1) + Cherry + 1 sheet, BB (2) + Cherry + Cherries, cherries +1, RB + cherry with the probability that the sum of the winning probabilities of the cherries, RB + cherries, BB (1) + cherries, BB (2) + cherries will be higher. RB + cherry + 1 sheet, BB (1) + cherry, BB (2) + cherry, BB (1) + cherry + 1 sheet, BB (2) + cherry + 1 sheet lottery, cherry + 1 sheet, RB + cherry + 1 sheet BB (1) + cherry + 1 sheet, BB (2) + cherry + 1 sheet are won, and the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the “cherry” symbol can be stopped on the right reel, Cherries, RB + Cherry, BB (1) + Cherry, BB (2) + Cherry are selected and can be used to stop the “Cherry” symbol on the right reel. By controlling so that the stop position is prioritized depending on when the stop operation is performed at the position, the set value is advantageous to the player due to the difference in the position where the `` cherry '' symbol stopped on the right reel It may be possible to infer whether or not.

  Also, cherry, cherry + 1, RB + cherry, RB + cherry + 1, BB (1) + cherry, BB (2) + cherry when the set value is 1 to 3 or the set value is 4 to 6. BB (1) + Cherry + 1 piece, BB (2) + Cherry + 1 piece of winning probability of +1 Cherry, RB + Cherry, BB (1) + Cherry, BB (2) + Cherry winning probability Cherry, Cherry + 1 sheet, RB + Cherry, RB + Cherry + 1 sheet, BB (1) + Cherry, BB (2) when the set value is 1 to 3 or the set value is 4 to 6 rather than the ratio of the values + Cherry, BB (1) + Cherry + 1, BB (2) + Cherry + 1Cherry +1 in the combined value of winning probability, RB + Cherry, BB (1) + Cherry, B (2) Cherry, Cherry + 1, RB + Cherry, RB + Cherry + 1, BB (1) + Cherry, BB (2) + Cherry, BB (1 ) + Cherry + 1 sheet, BB (2) + Cherry + 1 lottery, Cherry, RB + Cherry + 1 sheet, BB (1) + Cherry + 1 sheet, BB (2) + Cherry + 1 sheet are selected, right The case where the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the “cherry” symbol can be stopped on the reel, and +1 cherry, RB + cherry, BB (1) + cherry, BB (2) + cherry are selected. In the right reel, control is performed so that the stop position is prioritized when the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the “cherry” symbol can be stopped. And in may be able to set value by the difference in position "cherry" symbols is stopped in the right reel guess whether the advantageous setting value to the player.

  Also, cherry, cherry + 1, RB + cherry, RB + cherry + 1, BB (1) + cherry, BB (2) + cherry when the set value is 1 to 3 or the set value is 4 to 6. BB (1) + cherry + 1 sheet, BB (2) + cherry + 1 sheet of cherries +1, RB + cherry, BB (1) + cherry + 1 sheet, BB (2) + cherry + 1 sheet Cherry, Cherry + 1, RB + Cherry, RB + Cherry + 1, BB (1) + Cherry, when the set value is 1 to 3 or the set value is 4 to 6 BB (2) + cherry, BB (1) + cherry + 1 sheet, BB (2) + cherry + 1 sheet of cherries occupying the combined value of winning probability, RB + cherry, BB (1) + Cherry + Cherry + Cherry + 1 + RB + Cherry + RB + Cherry + 1 + BB (1) + Cherry + BB (2) ) + Cherry, BB (1) + Cherry + 1 sheet, BB (2) + Cherry + 1 sheet lottery, Cherry, RB + Cherry + 1 sheet, BB (1) + Cherry, BB (2) + Cherry If the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the “cherry” symbol can be stopped on the right reel, cherry + 1, RB + cherry, BB (1) + cherry + 1, BB (2) + cherry +1 is selected, and when the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the “Cherry” symbol can be stopped on the right reel, the stop is given priority. By controls differently, may be able to set value by the difference in position "cherry" symbols is stopped in the right reel guess whether the advantageous setting value to the player.

  Also, cherry, cherry + 1, RB + cherry, RB + cherry + 1, BB (1) + cherry, BB (2) + cherry when the set value is 1 to 3 or the set value is 4 to 6. BB (1) + cherry + 1 piece, BB (2) + cherry + 1 piece of winning probability of +1 cherry, RB + cherry + 1 piece, BB (1) + cherry, BB (2) + cherry win probability Cherry, Cherry + 1, RB + Cherry, RB + Cherry + 1, BB (1) + Cherry, BB () when the set value is 1 to 3 or the set value is 4 to 6 2) + cherry, BB (1) + cherry + 1 sheet, BB (2) + cherry + 1 sheet of cherries in the combined value of winning probabilities + 1 RB + cherry + 1 sheet, BB (1) + Jerry, BB (2) + Cherry, the probability of the combined value of the winning probability will be higher, Cherry, Cherry +1, RB + Cherry, RB + Cherry +1, BB (1) + Cherry, BB (2) + Cherry, A lottery of BB (1) + cherry + 1 and BB (2) + cherry + 1 will be performed, and cherry, RB + cherry, BB (1) + cherry, BB (2) + cherry + 1 will be selected, right reel When the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the “cherry” symbol can be stopped, the cherry +1 sheet, RB + cherry + 1 sheet, BB (1) + cherry, BB (2) + cherry are selected. In the right reel, the stop position at which the “cherry” symbol can be stopped can be stopped differently from when the stop operation is performed. Doing, may be able to set value by the difference in position "cherry" symbols is stopped in the right reel guess whether the advantageous setting value to the player.

  Also, in this embodiment, regardless of whether RB, BB (1), or BB (2) is won, the set value is advantageous to the player due to the difference in the position where the “cherry” symbol is stopped on the right reel. In the internal lottery, RB + cherry, RB + cherry + 1 sheet, BB (1) + cherry, BB when the setting value is 1 to 3 in the internal lottery. (2) + Cherry, BB (1) + Cherry + 1, BB (2) + Cherry + 1, RB + Cherry + 1, BB (1) + Cherry + 1, BB (2) + RB + Cherry, RB + Cherry + 1, BB (1) + Cherry, BB (2) + Cherry, BB (1) + Cherry when the set value is 4-6 rather than the ratio of the sum of the winning probability of Cherry + 1 The ratio of the combined value of the winning probability of RB + cherry + 1 sheet, BB (1) + cherry + 1 sheet, BB (2) + cherry + 1 sheet in the combined value of the winning probability of 1 sheet, BB (2) + cherry + 1 sheet RB + Cherry, RB + Cherry + 1, BB (1) + Cherry, BB (2) + Cherry, BB (1) + Cherry + 1, BB (2) + Cherry + 1 The ratio of the winning probability of cherries + 1 cherry to the combined value of the winning probability of cherries and cherries + 1 when the set value is 1 to 3 and the winning probability of cherries and cherries + 1 when the set value is 4 to 6 Cherries and cherries + 1 lottery will be performed with the probability that the winning probability of cherries + 1 in the combined value will be the same, cherry, RB + cherry, BB (1) + cherry, BB 2) When + Cherry is selected and the stop operation is performed at the stop position where the “Cherry” symbol can be stopped on the right reel, Cherry + 1, RB + Cherry + 1, BB (1) + Cherries + 1 and BB (2) + Cherries + 1 are selected, and when the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the “cherry” symbol can be stopped on the right reel, the stop is given priority. The position may be controlled to be different. By doing so, the “cherry” symbol is displayed on the right reel on the condition that RB, BB (1) or BB (2) are simultaneously selected. It becomes possible to infer whether the set value is a set value advantageous to the player or not by the difference in the stopped position.

  In the present embodiment, the position where the “cherry” symbol is likely to stop on the right reel is different between the case where the setting value is the setting 1 to 3 and the case where the setting is the setting 4 to 6. It suffices that at least one setting value of the plurality of types of setting values and at least one other setting value have different positions where the “cherry” symbol is likely to stop on the right reel.

  Further, in this embodiment, when RB, BB (1) or BB (2) is elected, out of the stop positions of the “cherry” symbols on the right reel, RB, BB (1) and BB (2) “Cherry” when BB (1) and BB (2) having higher advantages are elected, and when settings 4 to 6 having higher advantages among the settings 1 to 6 are set. By making the “Cherry” symbol easy to stop in the middle stage where the symbol is likely to stop, it is highly likely that a special role has been won, and a highly advantageous special role is likely to have been won, and is advantageous. It suggests that there is a high possibility that a high setting value is set, and when Cherry wins, it is possible to have a sharpness in the player's expectation of being in an advantageous state RB, BB (1 Or, when BB (2) is elected, among RB, BB (1) and BB (2), BB (1) and BB (1), which are more advantageous, are stopped positions of the “cherry” symbol on the right reel. The position where the “cherry” symbol is likely to stop when BB (2) is won or when at least one of settings 1 to 6 is set, which is more advantageous. By making it easier to stop the “Cherry” symbol at a different position from that of RB, even if there is no suggestion that RB, BB (1) or BB (2) is likely to be won, it is highly advantageous special It is suggested that there is a high possibility that a role has been won or that a setting value with a high advantage is set, and a special role with a high advantage may have been won. High or advantageous Even if it is not suggested that there is a high possibility that at least one of the set values is set, it is suggested that the special role is likely to be elected, so it may be disadvantageous on the other hand. Even if sex is suggested, it can be expected to be advantageous on the other side.

  Also, among the RB, BB (1) and BB (2), when the more advantageous BB (1) and BB (2) are elected, out of the stop positions of the “cherry” symbol on the right reel , RB, BB (1) or BB (2) is elected, or at least one of the settings 4 to 6 having higher advantages among the settings 1 to 6 is set. Even if it is not suggested that a special role with high advantage is highly likely to be won by making the “Cherry” symbol easy to stop at a position different from the position where the “Cherry” symbol is likely to stop, RB, It is suggested that there is a high possibility that BB (1) or BB (2) is won or that a highly advantageous setting value is set, and RB, BB ( 1) or BB (2) Even if there is no suggestion that there is a high possibility that at least one of the possibility of being selected or a setting value with a high advantage is set, there is a high possibility that a special role with a high advantage is elected Therefore, even if a disadvantageous possibility is suggested on the one hand, an advantageous possibility can be expected on the other hand.

  Further, in the case where settings 4 to 6 having higher advantages among the settings 1 to 6 are set, RB, BB (1) or BB (2) among the left reels is won, or RB , BB (1) and BB (2), where BB (1) and BB (2), which are more advantageous, are elected, the position where the “cherry” symbol is likely to stop Even if it is not suggested that a highly advantageous setting value is likely to be set by making the “cherry” symbol easy to stop at a position different from RB, RB, BB (1) or BB (2 ) Or BB (1) or BB (2) is likely to be suggested that there is a high possibility that at least one of the possibility of winning or a special role with a high degree of advantage has been won. Possibility of winning or high advantage Even if it is not suggested that there is a high probability that at least one of the possibility that the special role has been won, it is suggested that a highly advantageous setting value is set. Then, even if an unfavorable possibility is suggested, an advantageous possibility can be expected on the other side.

  In this embodiment, cherry, RB + cherry, BB (1) + cherry, BB (2) + cherry are selected, and the “cherry” symbol can be stopped on the winning line of the left reel. Even when a stop operation is performed at the operation position, control is performed to stop the “cherry” symbol in the upper and lower stages, cherry + 1 sheet, RB + cherry + 1 sheet, BB (1) + cherry + 1 sheet, BB (2) + If cherries + 1 are selected and the “Cherry” symbol is stopped at the stop operation position where it can be stopped on the winning line of the left reel, the “Cherry” symbol is displayed in the middle of the upper and lower rows. Even if it is not possible to stop the “Cherry” symbol on the right reel, there is a high possibility that the special role has been won and the advantage is high. It is possible to determine the difference between the possibility that the special role is elected and the possibility that a highly advantageous setting value is set, but the ratio of the `` cherry '' symbol on the left reel aligned at the top and bottom, The proportions in the middle row are Cherry, RB + Cherry, BB (1) + Cherry, BB (2) + Cherry, and Cherry + 1, RB + Cherry + 1, BB (1) + Cherry + 1, BB ( 2) When + Cherry + 1 is won, it may be controlled to be equal to each other, and in this way, the “Cherry” symbol can be stopped on both the left reel and the right reel. Can determine the difference between the possibility that a special role has been won, the possibility that a special role with high advantage has been won, and the possibility that a set value with high advantage has been set, "Cherry" on the left reel only If the symbol stops and the “Cherry” symbol cannot be stopped on the right reel, the possibility that a special role has been won, the possibility that a special role with high advantage has been won, and the advantage Since it is impossible to determine the difference in the possibility that a high setting value is set, it is possible to enhance the interest when playing a game aiming at “cherry” on both the left reel and the right reel. .

  Further, the sub CPU 91a executes a small role notification effect for notifying the type of the selected small role when the small role is won. Since the small role announcement production is executed at a higher rate when the special role is elected than when the special role is not elected, the small role announcement production is executed and the special role is won. This suggests the possibility of doing so.

  In addition, the small role notification effect includes a first small role notification effect and a second small role notification effect, and the sub CPU 91a selects one of the selected small type notification effects when executing the small role notification effect. Perform small role announcement production. At this time, when the special role is won, the ratio of the second small role notification effect being selected is higher than when the special role is not won, so the second small role notification effect is executed. Then, it is suggested that there is a higher possibility of winning the special role than when the first small role notification effect is executed.

  In addition, the ratio of the second small role announcement effect is higher when the cherry and one of the cherries are elected at the same time than when the cherry and the cherries are elected alone. At the time of winning, there is a possibility that a special role suggested by the position where the “Cherry” symbol stops on the right reel, a possibility that a special role with high advantage is won, and a setting value with high advantage is set And the type of small role announcement production are linked, and the selection of special roles, the special role with high advantage, and the setting value with high advantage are set according to the display mode and production of these reels. It is possible to synergistically increase the player's expectation of what is going on.

  Further, when executing the small role notification effect, the sub CPU 91a selects the start timing, and starts the small role notification effect from the selected timing. There are four start timings at the start of the game, at the first stop, at the second stop, and at the third stop. Since the ratio decreases in the order of the second stop, the first stop, and the start of the game, it seems that the possibility of winning the special role is the highest when starting from the third stop It is suggested that the possibility decreases in the order of the third stop, the second stop, and the first stop.

  In addition, the ratio of the first stop and the second stop is higher in the case where the cherry and one of the cherries are elected alone than in the case where the cherry and the one are simultaneously elected. , There is a possibility that a special role suggested by the position where the “Cherry” symbol stops on the right reel at the time of winning the cherry, a possibility that a special role with high advantage is won, and a setting value with high advantage The possibility of being set and the start timing of the small role announcement production are linked, and depending on the display mode of these reels and the start timing of the production, winning of special role, winning of special role with high advantage, high advantage It is possible to synergistically increase the player's expectation that the set value is set.

  In this embodiment, the gaming state includes an initial gaming state, RT (1), RT (2), and RB.

  Among these, the initial gaming state is a gaming state other than RB (BB) and RT (1) (2), and after BB or RB is finished, after the setting is changed, transition is made after RT (1) and RT (2) are finished. To do.

  In this embodiment, when the replay (1) wins in the initial game state (except for the state where any special role is won), the lottery probability of the special role and the small role is the same as the initial game state. However, the winning probability of the re-playing role is higher than the initial gaming state, and the payout rate of medals per game (the winning probability of the target role x the total number of payouts / the number of bets required for one game) Is controlled to a replay time (2) (RT (2)) that becomes less than 1. RT (2) reaches the specified number of games (999 games in this embodiment) without winning any special role, or replay (2) (3) wins, or reaches the specified number of games. It ends by winning one of the special roles before doing.

  In addition, when replays (8) to (10) win in the initial game state (excluding the state where any special role is won), the lottery probability of the special role and the small role is the same as the initial game state. There is a replay time (1) (RT (1)) in which the winning probability of the re-gamer is higher than in the initial gaming state and the medal payout rate per game exceeds 1. RT (1) reaches the specified number of games (50 games in this embodiment) without winning any special role, or wins any special role before reaching the specified number of games. It comes to end with.

  Note that RT (1) can be shifted only from the initial gaming state, and even if replays (8) to (10) win in RT (2), it does not shift to RT (2). Once it is controlled to RT (2), RT (2) is terminated, and thereafter, it does not shift to RT (1) until replays (8) to (10) win in the initial gaming state.

  Here, the transition state of the gaming state of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 20, in the initial gaming state (except for the state where any special role is elected), replays (8) to (10) When the display result of transition to RT (1) is derived, the process shifts to RT (1) where an increase in medals can be expected. RT (1) continues until the specified number of games (50 games) is reached unless any special combination is won. After the prescribed number of games is exhausted, if no special role is won, the game returns to the initial game state again. On the other hand, after the prescribed number of games is exhausted, if any special combination is won, the game returns to the initial gaming state through BB or RB by the selected special combination.

  Further, when the replay (1), that is, the transition display result to RT (2) is derived in the initial gaming state, the transition is made to RT (2) where an increase in medals cannot be expected. RT (2) continues until the prescribed number of games (999 games) is consumed, a special role is won, or replay (2) and replay (3) wins. When the prescribed number of games is consumed or when replay (2) and replay (3) are won, that is, when the end display result of RT (2) is derived, the initial game state is returned again. When the special combination is won (including simultaneous winning with replay (2) and replay (3)), the game returns to the initial gaming state via BB or RB by the selected special combination.

  When any special combination is won in the initial gaming state, the game does not shift to RT (1) or RT (2) until the selected special combination is won.

  As described above, in this embodiment, in the initial gaming state (except for a state where any special combination is won), RT (2) where an increase in medals cannot be expected, and RT (1) where an increase in medals can be expected. There is a possibility to move to both. For this reason, once the transition from the initial gaming state to RT (1) is made, an opportunity to transition to RT (1) again is provided even when RT (1) ends, and RT (1) is periodically controlled. It becomes possible to do. On the other hand, when transitioning from the initial gaming state to RT (2), there is no transition to RT (1) until the end of RT (2), but when RT (2) ends, the initial gaming state is entered again. Even in such a case, an opportunity to shift to RT (1) periodically comes. In other words, the initial gaming state functions as a chance zone that can be shifted to RT (1) where an increase in medals can be expected, and even if such a chance zone shifts to RT (2), it shifts to RT (1). Even if you do, you will visit periodically.

  In addition, when Replay (1) wins in the initial gaming state, the game moves to RT (2) where an increase in medals cannot be expected. In this embodiment, when Replay GR (1) to (3) is won. It is impossible to intentionally avoid the replay (1) winning, that is, it is impossible to win the replay (4) to (7), and the replay (4) to (7) is won with a probability of 1/3. Although it is possible to avoid the transition to RT (2) where an increase in medals cannot be expected, the replay (1) wins with a probability of 2/3. It becomes. That is, when the replay GR (1) to (3) is won in the initial game state, an operating procedure that matches the winning conditions of the replays (4) to (7) is performed, that is, RT by the player's technical intervention. Transition to (2) can be avoided. At this time, the operation procedure as a winning condition changes depending on whether the replay GR (1) is won, the replay GR (2) is won, or the replay GR (3) is won. It is inferred whether the GR is won or not, and whether or not to shift to RT (2) is determined depending on whether or not it wins.

  In this embodiment, the re-game is applied as the transition display result to RT (1), the transition display result to RT (2), and the end display result of RT (2). As a result, a small combination may be applied, or a specific display result in which no winning combination is won (for example, a display result derived when a small combination is missed) may be applied.

  In this embodiment, the reel stop order for avoiding the derivation of the display result of transition to RT (2) differs depending on the combination of winning combinations. However, RT (2) depends on the winning combination or combination of winning combinations. The timing of the reel stop operation for avoiding the derivation of the transition display result to () may be different.

  In this embodiment, the transition display result to RT (1) and the transition display result to RT (2) are won separately, but the transition display result to RT (1) and the transition to RT (2) are won. When the display result is won at the same time and a stop operation is performed in the operation procedure for deriving the transition display result to RT (1), the transition display result to RT (1) is derived and to RT (1). The transition display result to RT (2) may be derived when a stop operation is performed with an operation procedure different from the operation procedure for deriving the transition display result of RT. By doing this, RT (2 ), The transition to RT (1) can be made at the same time. Furthermore, an operation for deriving the transition display result to RT (1) by simultaneously winning the transition display result to RT (1), the transition display result to RT (2), and the display result not transitioning to any of them. When the stop operation is performed in the procedure, the transition display result to RT (1) is derived, and when the stop operation is performed in the operation procedure for deriving the transition display result to RT (2), RT ( The transition display result to 2) is derived, and a transition display result that does not transition to any RT is derived when a stop operation is performed in a procedure other than these, and in this case, the initial gaming state is maintained It is good also as a structure.

  Also, in this embodiment, after RT (1) where an increase in medals can be expected, if any special role is won before reaching the specified number of games, RT (1) is not terminated. RT (1) is ended when any special role wins or when the specified number of games is reached without winning any special role. After the start of RT (1), Even if one of the special roles wins before reaching the specified number of games, if the selected special role does not win, RT (1) will not end with the special role winning, and the selected special role If no special prize is won, it will be possible to continue to control RT (1) until the specified number of games is reached. Therefore, even if a special part is won in RT (1), the special part won is won. If not, RT (until the specified number of games is reached. ) It is possible to digest.

  In addition, since the winning flag of the special role is carried over after the next game until the special role is won, after the RT (1) reaches the specified number of games, the special role won during that time is awarded. It becomes possible. In addition, when a special combination and a re-playing role are won at the same time, priority is given to the control of aligning the re-playing role on the winning line over the special role, so RT (1) having a high re-playing role winning probability is selected. While continuing, it is difficult to determine whether or not the special role is won, and it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the special role is won at the end of RT (1). it can.

  Further, in this embodiment, when a replay (2) or a replay (3) wins in RT (2) which is in a gaming state unfavorable for the player and does not shift to RT (1), the RT (2 ) Is completed and the game is shifted to the initial game state which may shift to RT (1) which is advantageous to the player again. Even if there is no RT (2), the expectation for moving to RT (1) advantageous to the player again can be maintained.

  Also, in RT (2), there are cases where replay (2) (3), which will end RT (2), wins alone and when it wins at the same time as a special role, RT (2) When the replay (2) (3) wins in the game, RT (2) disadvantageous for the player is finished, not only the transition to the initial gaming state, but also the player's expectation for winning the special role be able to.

  In RT (2), the replay (3) is more than the ratio of the winning probability of special combination + replay (2) in the combined probability of the winning probability of replay (2) and special combination + replay (2) in the internal lottery. ), Replay (2), replay (3), special role + replay (with a probability that the winning probability of special role + replay (3) in the combined probability of winning probability of special role + replay (3) will be higher 2) The special role + replay (3) is drawn, and in RT (2), the replay (3) wins the special role than the replay (2) wins. In RT (2), no matter which replay (2) or replay (3) wins, RT (2), which is disadvantageous for the player, will end, Possibility of winning a role But is suggested, or Replay (2) has been won, replay (3) whether you win, makes it possible to have a change in the player's expectations for the winning of the special role.

  In addition, when replay (2) and replay (3) are won in RT (1), the special role is always won. If RT (2), RT (2) ends. When the replay (2) and replay (3) to be won wins at RT (1), the special role is always elected, and when the replay (2) and replay (3) wins the special role Therefore, not only RT (2) but also RT (1), Replay (2) and Replay (3) are significant wins.

  In addition, when replays (4) to (7) are won in RT (2), they are always won at the same time as the special role, and the replay will shift to RT (2) in the initial gaming state. When one of the replays (4) to (7) that appears when the winning of (1) is avoided, a special role is always won, so if the game is in the initial gaming state, the replay (4 ) To (7) can be notified that the transition to RT (2) has been avoided by winning, and if RT (2), special replays (4) to (7) will be awarded. Since the winning of the combination is suggested, not only the initial gaming state but also the replays (4) to (7) are significant in RT (2).

  In addition, even when replays (8) to (10) are won in RT (2), they are always won at the same time as the special role, and the transition to RT (1) is advantageous to the player in the initial gaming state. Even if one of the replays (8) to (10) to be won wins, the special role is always won, so if the game is in the initial gaming state, the replays (8) to (10) win. Therefore, the transition to RT (1) advantageous to the player is made, and if it is RT (2), the winning of the special role is suggested by winning the replays (8) to (10), so only the initial gaming state In addition, replays (8) to (10) are significant wins even at RT (2).

  In this embodiment, after the start of RT (2), the end display result (replay (2), replay (3)) is derived before reaching the specified number of games, so that RT (2) Although the game is finished and the game state is shifted to the initial game state, the end display result is not provided, and RT (2) may be finished when the specified number of games is reached or the special combination is won. However, RT (2) may be ended when the end display result is derived or the special combination is won without providing the prescribed number of games.

  Further, in this embodiment, the winning probability of replays (8) to (10) (replay GR (4)), which is a trigger for transition to RT (1), regardless of the initial game state transitioned at any opportunity, The winning probability of Replay (1) (Replay GR (1) to (3)), which is the trigger for the transition to RT (2), is the same, but RT (2) ends and transitions due to the winning of Replay (2) Of the replay (8) to (10) (replay GR (4)) that triggers the transition to RT (1) between the initial game state and the initial game state that has been finished and shifted due to the winning of the replay (3) One or both of the winning probabilities and the winning probabilities of replay (1) (replay GR (1) to (3)) that triggers the transition to RT (2) may be different. Whether RT (2) ended due to the replay (2) winning, Ratio of transition to RT (1) that is advantageous to the player in the subsequent initial gaming state, depending on whether it is ended by winning the ray (3), that is, which end display result is derived from among a plurality of types of end display results It becomes possible to change one or both of the ratios that shift to RT (2), which is disadvantageous for the player, and to change the game flow even in the same initial gaming state.

  For example, in one initial gaming state, if the winning probability of replays (8) to (10) (replay GR (4)) that triggers the transition to RT (1) is higher than the other initial gaming state, The possibility that the initial gaming state shifts to RT (1) is higher than the other initial gaming state. At this time, in one initial gaming state, if the winning probability of replay (1) (replay GR (1) to (3)) that triggers the transition to RT (2) is lower than the other initial gaming state, There is a higher possibility that the initial gaming state will shift to RT (1) than the other initial gaming state, and in one initial gaming state, the transition timing to RT (2) than the other initial gaming state If the winning probability of Replay (1) (Replay GR (1) to (3)) is increased, RT (1) or RT ( It will shift to either of 2).

  Therefore, for example, when replay (3) wins and shifts to the initial gaming state, the possibility of shifting to RT (1) is greater than when replay (2) wins and shifts to the initial gaming state. When the replay (3) wins at RT (2), the sense of expectation for shifting to RT (1) can be enhanced more than when the replay (2) wins.

  In addition, an initial game state in which the replay (2) and the replay (3) are won and the RT (2) is ended and the transition is made, and an initial game state in which the RT (2) is finished and the transition is made by digestion of the prescribed number of games The winning probability of replays (8) to (10) (replay GR (4)) that triggers the transition to RT (1), replay (1) (replay GR (1) that triggers the transition to RT (2) ) To (3)) may be different in one or both of the winning probabilities, and in this way, RT (2) is terminated by deriving the end display result or terminated by digesting the prescribed number of games. It is possible to change one or both of the rate of transition to RT (1) advantageous to the player and the rate of transition to RT (2) disadvantageous to the player in the subsequent initial gaming state. The same initial game Even in the state it is possible to have a change in the flow of the game. For example, when RT (2) is finished and the game state is shifted to the initial game state due to digestion of the prescribed number of games, replay (2) and replay (3) are won and RT (2) is finished and the initial game state is finished. By making the possibility of shifting to RT (1) higher than the case of shifting to RT (2), it reaches the specified number of games and reaches RT (2) than when RT (2) ends before the specified number of games elapses. ) Is completed, it is possible to increase the expectation for moving to RT (1).

  In addition, the replay (8) that triggers the transition to RT (1) between the initial gaming state that has transitioned after the end of BB or RB and the initial gaming state that has transitioned after RT (1) or RT (2) has transitioned ~ (10) One or both of the winning probabilities of (Replay GR (4)) and the winning probabilities of Replay (1) (Replay GR (1) ~ (3)) that trigger the transition to RT (2) are different In this way, by doing in this way, the initial gaming state that has been shifted to after the end of BB or RB, that is, whether the transition has been made after the end of the bonus, RT (1) or RT (2) has been completed, Thus, in the subsequent initial gaming state, it is possible to change one or both of the rate of transition to RT (1) advantageous to the player and the rate of transition to RT (2) disadvantageous to the player. Play Even when it is possible to have a change in the flow of the game. For example, when transitioning to the initial gaming state after completion of RT (1), the possibility of transitioning to RT (1) is higher than when transitioning to the initial gaming state after termination of BB or RB, It is possible to increase the expectation for the transition to RT (1) again after the transition to RT (1) once than the end of BB or RB. In addition, when transitioning to the initial gaming state after the end of RT (1), the transition to the initial gaming state is made shorter than when transitioning to the initial gaming state after the end of BB or RB. After that, the flow of the initial game state and the loop of RT (1) can be accelerated.

  In addition, the replays (8) to (10) that trigger the transition to RT (1) between the initial gaming state that has transitioned after RT (1) has finished and the initial gaming state that has transitioned since RT (2) has finished. ) (Replay GR (4)) winning probability, and replay (1) (replay GR (1) to (3)) winning chance to be transferred to RT (2), either or both may be different Well, in this way, depending on whether RT (1), which is advantageous to the player, has been transferred, or RT (2), which is disadvantageous to the player, has been completed, the subsequent initial gaming state , It is possible to change one or both of the rate of transition to RT (1) advantageous to the player and the rate of transition to RT (2) disadvantageous to the player. Making the flow change It can be. For example, when RT (2) is finished and the initial gaming state is entered, the possibility of entering RT (1) is made higher than when RT (1) is finished and the initial gaming state is entered. Therefore, since the transition to RT (1) can be expected at the end of RT (2) rather than the end of RT (1), the willingness to continue the game until RT (2) ends is maintained Can be made.

  Replays (8) to (10) (replay GR (4) that trigger the transition to RT (1) between the initial gaming state that has transitioned after BB has finished and the initial gaming state that has transitioned since RB has finished. )) Winning probability, and one or both of the winning probabilities of replay (1) (replay GR (1) to (3)) that triggers the transition to RT (2) may be different. Thus, depending on which of the plurality of types of bonuses is transferred after the end of the bonus, in the subsequent initial gaming state, the rate of shifting to RT (1) advantageous to the player, RT (2 disadvantageous to the player) It is possible to change one or both of the ratios to shift to), and to change the flow of the game even in the same initial gaming state. For example, when the BB is finished and the state is shifted to the initial gaming state, the RB is finished at the end of the BB by increasing the possibility of the transition to the RT (1) than the initial gaming state that is shifted to the RB. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation for the transition to RT (1) than at the end of the process.

  In addition, the replays (8) to (10) (replay GR (4)), which are the triggers for transitioning to RT (1), with the initial gaming state transitioned after the setting change and the initial gaming state transitioned due to other triggers. One or both of the winning probabilities and the winning probabilities of replay (1) (replay GR (1) to (3)) that triggers the transition to RT (2) may be different. Transition to RT (1), which is advantageous for the player, and RT (2), which is disadvantageous for the player, in the initial initial gaming state, depending on whether the transition has occurred after the setting change or other occasions It is possible to change one or both of the ratios to be played, so that even in the same initial gaming state, it is possible to change the flow of the game, and whether to move to RT (1) in the morning initial gaming state To migrate to RT (2), or it can be inferred whether or not setting is changed by the difference in the length of stay in the initial game state. In addition, when the transition to the initial gaming state is made after the setting is changed, the possibility of shifting to RT (1) is made higher than the case where the transition is made to the initial gaming state at other occasions. Since it can be expected to shift to (1), the operation of the slot machine immediately after opening the store can be improved.

  In this embodiment, the sub CPU 91a performs a BB medium effect unique to BB during BB, an RB medium effect unique to RB during RB (excluding RB in BB), and RT (1) during RT (1). ), Each of the effects during RT is executed.

  The BB effect, the RB effect, and the RT effect each include a plurality of types, and the sub CPU 91a selects any one of the types selected at the time of BB winning, RB winning, or RT (1) transition. BB production, RB production, and RT production are executed.

  In addition, the sub CPU 91a determines when the special combination won in RT (2) wins, when the special combination won in RT (2) or the initial game state shifted after the setting change, RT (2) or setting change. Starting from one of the points of transition to RT (1) in the initial gaming state that was later transitioned, gaming states other than RT (2) (initial gaming state, RT (1), BB, RB) continue. A net increase in the number of medals during a certain period (hereinafter referred to as a loop period) (the number of payouts—the number consumed for setting the number of bets) is counted.

  When the sub CPU 91a wins a BB in the loop period, the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not the net increase in the number of medals in the loop period exceeds 1000, and on the condition that it is determined that it has exceeded, A special BB medium effect different from the BB medium effect is executed.

  In addition, even when the sub CPU 91a wins an RB in the loop period, the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not the net increase in the number of medals in the loop period exceeds 1000. A special RB production that is different from the RB production is executed, and whether or not the net increase in the number of medals in the loop period exceeds 1000 even when the process shifts to RT (1) in the loop period. And a special RT effect that is different from the normal RT effect is executed on the condition that it has been determined that it has been exceeded.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the net increase in the number of medals during the loop period, that is, the period in which the player is in an advantageous state, and the BB effect, the RB effect, and the RT effect change in relation to each other. Therefore, it is possible to effectively increase the sense of accomplishment and superiority of the player who has won many medals.

  Furthermore, the sub CPU 91a also counts the number of transitions to RT (1) in the loop period in addition to the net increase in the number of medals in the loop period, and when the loop period continues, the net increase in the loop period is 2000 sheets. And the number of transitions to RT (1) during the loop period exceeds 10 times, the net increase in the loop period exceeds 2000, and the transition to RT (1) during the loop period The mass acquisition effect is executed on the condition that it is determined that the number of times of transition exceeds 10 times. In this way, the mass acquisition effect is executed unless the condition of high difficulty that the net increase in the loop period exceeds 2000 and the number of transitions to RT (1) during the loop period exceeds 10 is not achieved. Therefore, not only has the player won a lot of medals due to the large-scale production, but has made many transitions to RT (1), as well as having achieved more difficult conditions. The sense of accomplishment and superiority can be effectively increased.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 91a executes a specific suggestion effect that suggests the current gaming state or the possibility of winning the special role.

  The specific suggestion effect is executed when a win is made in the specific suggestion effect lottery performed by the sub CPU 91a. Further, the sub CPU 91a controls to two types of lottery modes including a low probability mode in which the winning probability of the specific suggestion effect lottery is low and a high probability mode in which the winning probability of the specific suggestion effect lottery is higher than that in the low probability mode. In the lottery mode, one of the lottery modes is selected by the lottery mode transition lottery performed by the sub CPU 91a, and the lottery mode shifts to the selected lottery mode.

  The winning probability of the high probability mode in the lottery mode transition lottery is compared with the case where the remaining number of games in RT (2) is less than 100 games and the remaining number of games is 10 games or more in RT (2). High probability is set. For this reason, as the end of RT (2) approaches, the probability that the high probability mode is selected in the lottery mode transition lottery increases and the frequency of appearance of the specific suggestion increases. (2) is completed, and the sense of expectation for shifting to the initial gaming state that may shift to RT (1) can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, the winning probability in the high probability mode in the lottery mode transition lottery is set to a higher probability than in the case of RT (2) when the gaming state is the initial gaming state. For this reason, when RT (2) ends and the transition to the initial gaming state occurs, the probability that the high probability mode is selected in the lottery mode transition lottery increases and the frequency of appearance of the specific suggestion is further increased. As a result of the frequent occurrence of RT, the expectation can be enhanced even when RT (2) is finished and the game is shifted to the initial gaming state where there is a possibility of shifting to RT (1).

  In addition, the winning probability in the high probability mode in the lottery mode transition lottery is set to a higher probability when any special role is won in RT (1) than when no special role is won. . For this reason, if any special role is won in RT (1), the probability that the high probability mode will be selected in the lottery mode transition lottery increases, and the appearance frequency of the specific suggestion effect increases. Since the specific suggestion effect frequently appears during RT (1), it is possible to increase the expectation that the special role is won after the end of RT (1).

  In addition, the winning probability in the high probability mode in the lottery mode transition lottery is that there is a possibility of winning at the same time as any special role in RT (1), Cherry + 1 Cherry, Replay GR (4), Replay GR (5) Is set to a higher probability than when Cherry, Cherry + 1, Replay GR (4), and Replay GR (5) are not won. For this reason, an event that increases the chances of winning a special role, that is, when Cherry, Cherry + 1, Replay GR (4), or Replay GR (5) that may be won at the same time as a special role in RT (1) If this occurs, the probability that the high probability mode will be selected in the lottery mode transition lottery is increased, and the frequency of appearance of the specific suggestion is increased. Therefore, depending on the event that occurred during RT (1) After the completion of RT (1), it is possible to effectively increase the expectation that the special role is won.

  As described above, in this embodiment, from the appearance frequency of the specific suggestion effect, the game state is shifted to the initial game state before the game state is close in RT (2), or RT (2) has already ended and the game state is shifted to the initial game state. In RT (1), the possibility of winning a special role can be inferred from the appearance frequency of the specific suggestion effect.

  Further, the sub CPU 91a selects and displays one of a plurality of different backgrounds as the background image of the liquid crystal display 51.

  There are three types of background images: daytime, evening, and night. One of the backgrounds is selected by the background selection lottery performed by the sub CPU 91a, and the background image of the liquid crystal display 51 is changed.

  The evening winning probability in the background selection lottery is higher in RT (2) when the number of remaining games in RT (2) is less than 100 games compared to the case where the number of remaining games is 10 or more. Is set. For this reason, as the end of RT (2) approaches, the probability that an evening background will be selected in the background selection lottery increases. Therefore, when the background image shifts to the evening background, RT (2) ends and RT ( A sense of expectation for shifting to an initial gaming state that may shift to 1) can be increased.

  Further, the evening winning probability in the background selection lottery is set to a higher probability when the gaming state is the initial gaming state than when it is RT (2). For this reason, when RT (2) ends and the game state shifts to the initial game state, the probability that an evening background is selected in the background selection lottery is further increased. Therefore, when the background image shifts to the evening background, RT (2 ) Is finished, and the expectation can also be enhanced for the transition to the initial gaming state where there is a possibility of transition to RT (1).

  In the background selection lottery, when the gaming state is RT (2), the remaining number of games in RT (2) is less than 100 games, or RT (2) is terminated and the initial gaming state is entered. The night background is elected on the condition that the background image is shifted to the night background and the background image shifts to the initial gaming state soon or has already shifted to the initial gaming state. Is notified.

  The evening winning probability in the background selection lottery is set to a higher probability when any special combination is won in RT (1) than when no special combination is selected. For this reason, if any special role is won in RT (1), the probability that an evening background will be selected in the background selection lottery is further increased, so that the background image shifts to the evening background. , After RT (1), the expectation that the special role is elected can be enhanced.

  In the background selection lottery, when the gaming state is RT (1), the night background is won on the condition that any special role is won. When the image shifts to the night background, it is notified that the special role is won.

  As described above, in this embodiment, due to the difference in the background images, the game state is shifted to the initial game state before the game state is close in RT (2), or RT (2) has already ended and the game state is shifted to the initial game state. The possibility of being able to be guessed.

  In RT (1), the possibility of winning the special role can be inferred from the difference in background images.

  Further, the sub CPU 91a performs the background selection lottery with the specific suggestion effect as a trigger, and when the background selection lottery is won, the sub CPU 91a changes the background via the specific suggestion effect. For this reason, the frequency with which the background image changes, that is, the frequency at which the current gaming state and the possibility of winning the special role can be inferred from the background of the production is not always constant, but changes depending on the lottery mode. It can be changed in association with the frequency of the suggestion effect.

  In addition, the winning probability in the high probability mode in the lottery mode transition lottery is set to a higher probability when the background image is evening or night than when it is daytime. For this reason, in the case of shifting to the initial gaming state in the near future, or in the case of already shifting to the initial gaming state, the ratio of the background image to evening or night is high, and the background image changes to evening or night. As a result, the frequency of appearance of specific suggestion synergistically increases.

  On the other hand, the evening or night winning probability in the background selection lottery is set higher than the low probability mode when the lottery mode is the high probability mode. For this reason, in the case of shifting to the initial gaming state in the near future, or in the case of already shifting to the initial gaming state, if the special role is won in RT (1), the frequency of appearance of the specific suggestion effect increases. In addition, as the frequency of appearance of specific suggestion increases, the ratio of synergistic evening background and night background increases.

  As described above, when the game is shifted to the initial game state in the near future, or when the game is already transferred to the initial game state, when the special role is won at RT (1), the background image changes to evening or night. The frequency of appearance of the specific suggestion synergistically increases, and the frequency of occurrence of the specific suggestion synergistically increases as the frequency of occurrence of the specific suggestion synergistically increases. From the difference, it is easy to infer that it will be shifted to the initial gaming state in the near future or that it has already shifted to the initial gaming state, and that it has won the special role in RT (1).

  In addition, the sub CPU 91a sets the low probability mode as the lottery mode regardless of whether or not the lottery mode and the background image are backed up at the time of activation, and in the lottery mode transition lottery in the first game after the activation. The probability of winning in the high probability mode and the probability of winning in the evening in the background selection lottery are set higher than those in the second and subsequent games. For this reason, since the appearance frequency of the specific suggestion effect and the possibility that the background image is changed in the first game after the opening of the game shop in which the slot machine 1 is installed increase, the appearance frequency and background of the specific suggestion effect immediately after the store opening The image can be scattered.

  In addition, the probability that the high probability mode wins in the lottery mode transition lottery in the first game after the start and the probability that the evening wins in the background selection lottery are determined according to the set value of the play rate. Since the setting value can be estimated from the appearance frequency and background image of the specific suggestion effect immediately after opening the store, the operation of the slot machine immediately after opening the store can be improved.

  Note that the probability of winning the high probability mode in the lottery mode transition lottery and the probability of winning in the evening in the background selection lottery do not have to be different for each of the setting values 1 to 6, for example, lottery mode transition lottery Even if the probability setting value 1 to 3 and the setting value 4 to 6 are determined differently in the probability of winning the high probability mode and the evening selection in the background selection lottery, the same effect as above Can be obtained.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the end display result is derived in RT (2) so that RT (2) ends. However, during RT (2) where the prescribed number of games is not defined. Alternatively, RT (2) may be ended by deriving the end display result so as to shift to the end RT with a predetermined number of games.

  In addition, a configuration in which RT (2) is terminated by shifting to an ending RT with a defined number of games by deriving an end display result during RT (2) with an unspecified number of games In this case, the winning probability of the re-playing role in the end RT is set higher than RT (2), and the end display result and the special role can be made simultaneously, and the special role winning simultaneously with the end display result is won. In some cases, it is preferable to move to RT after winning, where the winning probability of the re-gamer is set higher than RT (2). Since the winning of the re-playing role is prioritized and it becomes difficult to win the special role, it is determined whether or not the special role is won until the end RT is finished after the end display result is derived in RT (2). To determine whether To become a flame, it is possible to maintain the expectation for winning a special role due to that the end displays the results derived in RT (2).

  Further, the sub CPU 91a is an opportunity to transition to the RT for ending, and when the replay (2) (3) indicating the possibility that the special role has been won wins, the sub CPU 91a continues over the number of continuing RT RT games. It is preferable to perform a continuous effect that leads to an effect result that indicates whether or not a special role has been won. In this way, since the continuous performance is executed in duplicate with the RT which is difficult to determine whether or not the special role is won, the result of the continuous production, that is, whether the special role is won or not It is possible to focus attention on the result of the negative.

  In addition, even if the special combination is not won as a result of the continuous performance, the game shifts to the initial game state where there is a possibility of shifting to RT (1), which is advantageous to the player, so RT (2) When the replays (2) and (3) are won and continuous effects are executed, the player's expectation can be enhanced regardless of the result.

  Here, a description will be given of the continuous effects. A plurality of combinations are determined in advance as the effect patterns of each game constituting the continuous effects. When the sub CPU 91a starts the continuous production, the sub CPU 91a selects the combination of the production patterns at a ratio according to whether or not the special combination is won. For example, if the ratio of the first combination selected from the first combination and the second combination is higher when the special combination is won than when the special combination is not selected, the first combination When the continuous effect is executed, the expectation for winning the special role can be enhanced as compared with the case where the continuous effect is executed with the second combination.

  On the other hand, cherry blossoms and replays (2) and (3) may be awarded after the start of continuous production, suggesting the possibility of winning special roles even before the end. In addition, the possibility of winning a special role will increase, but if the combination of production patterns is determined in advance as described above, even if Cherry, Replay (2) (3) wins, There is no change in the flow, and the expectation of special roles due to continuous production does not change.

  For this reason, after the start of the continuous performance, when the Cherry, Replay (2) (3), which is suggested to have won the special role before the end, wins the continuous performance currently being executed. Whether or not to change to a combination of production patterns that can be expected to win special roles rather than a combination of production patterns, that is, a ratio that is selected when the special role is won is higher than the current combination If it is determined to be changed, the remaining continuous effects are executed based on the changed combination. As a result, a continuous production showing the possibility of winning the special role, especially a continuous production based on a combination of production patterns that cannot be expected very much for the special role wins, and before the end, further cherry, replay (2) If the possibility that (3) won a prize and a special role was elected was suggested, and the possibility increased, the content of the performance of the continuous performance was also elected as a special role from the current one. May change to a content that can be expected, so that the player's expectation of winning the special role can be effectively increased in accordance with an event that occurred during the continuous performance.

  Further, at this time, it is preferable that the change of the production content is determined with a higher probability as the possibility of winning the special role indicated by the reel stop result is higher. In other words, the change of the production content is determined with a higher probability when the “cherry” is stopped at the middle stage than when the “cherry” is stopped at the upper or lower stage of the right reel or the left reel, or the replay ( 2) In Replay (3), replay (3), which suggests that there is a higher possibility of winning the special role than when Replay (2) wins, the content of the production is changed with a higher probability. It is preferable to be determined, and by doing so, it is possible to appropriately increase the player's expectation by changing the contents of the performance.

  In addition, in the above, when a role that suggests the possibility of winning a special role is won after the start of the continuous performance, the combination of the performance patterns of the continuous performance currently being executed When the decision is made to change to a combination of production patterns that can be expected to win the special role, the remaining continuous production is executed based on the combination after the change. The effect pattern of one game (for example, the effect pattern of the remaining one game) is changed to an effect pattern that corresponds to a combination of effect patterns that can be expected to win a special role rather than a combination of effect patterns that is initially executed. Even if you do this, after the continuous production showing the possibility of winning the special role starts, before winning the special role, When the possibility increases, the content of the production of the continuous production will change to the content that can be expected to win the special role accordingly, so depending on the event that occurred during the continuous production It is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation for winning the special role.

  In the present embodiment, the replay GR (4) that is allowed to win the replays (8) to (10) that trigger the transition to RT (1) in the initial gaming state may be won at the same time as the special role. Even if the replay GR (4) and the special combination are simultaneously elected in (1) and any one of the replays (8) to (10) wins, it does not shift to RT (1).

  On the other hand, the sub CPU 91a, when any of the replays (8) to (10) wins in the initial gaming state and transitions to RT (1), notifies the RT transition notification effect of transitioning to RT (1). When the replay GR (4) and the special role are simultaneously elected at RT (1) and any one of the replays (8) to (10) wins, the process proceeds to RT (1) as described above. Although it does not shift, the RT transition notification effect is once executed to notify that the transition to RT (1) is performed, and then the fact that the special role is won is notified.

  For this reason, when replays (8) to (10) win in the initial gaming state, it will normally be transferred to RT (1), but when replay GR (4) and special role are won simultaneously In other words, if the transition to BB or RB that is more advantageous to the player than RT (1) is allowed, the transition from RT (1) to the gaming state with the lower degree of advantage is allowed. Since it is notified that the transition to the gaming state having a high advantage is permitted, the interest can be further enhanced as compared with the case where the winning of the special role is notified from the beginning.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the replay GR (4) is won in the initial gaming state, if the stop operation is performed with the left reel as the first stop reel, the replay (8) that is the result of transition to RT (1) is displayed. ) To (10) are always derived and can be transferred to RT (1). In the initial gaming state, depending on the winning combination or combination of winning combinations, the display of transition to RT (1) The operation procedure as a result derivation condition may be different.

  For example, as in the case of replay GR (1) to (3), the reel stop order as a condition for deriving the display result of transition to RT (1) may differ depending on the combination of winning combinations, Depending on the combination of winning combinations, the timing of the reel stop operation as a condition for deriving the display result of transition to RT (1) may be different. If the latter, replay (1) + replay (8), replay (1) + replay (9), replay (1) + replay (10) will be drawn respectively, and replay (1) + replay (8) will be won The replay (1) + replay (9) wins, or the replay (1) + replay (10) wins, depending on whether the replay (8) to (10) is derived. What is necessary is just to set it as the structure from which the timing of stop operation differs.

  By doing in this way, even when the derivation condition of the transition display result to RT (1) is won in the initial gaming state, the derivation corresponding to the operation procedure selected by the player and the combination of winning combination or winning combination is made. If the operating procedure as a condition does not match, it is not possible to shift to RT (1), and it is necessary to estimate the operating procedure as a derivation condition, so that the game performance in the initial gaming state can be improved.

  In addition, when the transition display result to RT (1) and the special combination are elected at the same time, when the special combination is won at the same time, the derivation condition corresponds to the winning combination or the combination of the winning combination. It is preferable that the display result of transition to RT (1) is derived for any of the operation procedures.

  In order to derive the transition display result to RT (1) in any of the operation procedures which are the derivation conditions corresponding to the winning combination or the combination of winning combinations when the special combination is won simultaneously In addition to the combination of winning combinations in which the stop order in which the transition display result to RT (1) wins is determined separately, the winning in which the transition display result to RT (1) is derived regardless of the stop order What is necessary is just to make a combination of a combination win at the same time as a special combination. When a special combination is won at the same time, in order to derive the transition display result to RT (1) regardless of the timing of stop operation, In order to cover the operation timing, a plurality of types of winning combinations or combinations of winning combinations may be won simultaneously with the special combination.

  In this way, when the transition display result to RT (1) is won by itself in the initial gaming state, it corresponds to the operation procedure selected by the player and the type of winning combination or combination of winning combinations If the operating procedure that is the derivation condition to be matched does not match, the prize will not be won. However, if the special combination is won at the same time as the transition display result to RT (1) in the initial gaming state, The transition display result to RT (1) is derived for any of the operation procedures that are the derivation conditions corresponding to the combination of the combinations, so the transition to RT (1) in the initial gaming state When the display result is derived, there is a higher possibility that the special role will be won at the same time. When the display result of transition to RT (1) is derived in the initial gaming state, the special role is won. A sense of anticipation It is possible to enhance the results basis.

  In the present embodiment, when any one of the replays GR (1) to (3) is won, regardless of which reel is selected as the first stop reel, the replay (1) or the replays (4) to (7) are always performed. Since one of the above wins, there is no difference in the expected payout value only by looking at that game. However, as described above, when Replay (1) wins in the initial gaming state, the initial gaming state ends and the increase in medals When replay GR (1)-(3) is elected, it is not replay (1), because it will shift to RT (2) which cannot be expected and will not shift to RT (1). By winning the replays (4) to (7), it is possible to avoid the end of the initial gaming state.

  However, when any of the replays GR (1) to (3) is won, if the type is not known, the first stop reel for which the replays (4) to (7) will win is selected. The first stop reel is selected that will result in the replays (4) to (7) winning at a rate of 1/3, but the replay (1) will win at a rate of 2/3. The first stop reel is selected, and the initial gaming state is ended and the routine proceeds to RT (2).

  On the other hand, the sub CPU 91a, when any one of the replays GR (1) to (3) wins, the first stop reel (replay GR (1)) that the replays (4) to (7) will win. It is possible to execute a stop order notification informing the left reel at the time of winning, the middle reel at the time of winning the replay GR (2), and the right reel at the time of winning the replay GR (3). Yes, the stop order notification is executed, so that the player can specify the first stop reel that the replays (4) to (7) will win, and the notified reel is set as the first stop. By doing so, it becomes possible to win replays (4) to (7) instead of replay (1), so that it is possible to avoid the end of the initial gaming state and the transition to RT (2). It has become.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the replay GR (4) is won in the initial gaming state, if the left reel is set to the first stop, replays (8) to (10) for shifting to RT (1) are performed. Although it is possible to win reliably, if the reels other than the left reel are set to the first stop, the replay (8) to (10) may be missed and the replay (1) wins. However, if the replay GR (4) is won in the initial gaming state, the sub CPU 91a may execute stop order notification that notifies the left reel. The stop order notification is executed, so that the player can specify the first stop reel that the replays (8) to (10) will win. To stop Replay (8) to (10) can be won instead of replay (1), and it is possible to shift to RT (1), which is advantageous to the player, and the initial gaming state ends and RT (2) ) Can be avoided.

  Note that the stop order notification is not particularly limited as long as the player can recognize the first stop reel. The notification may be made by turning on a corresponding LED, outputting a corresponding sound, or the like.

  Conventionally, when a specific winning combination is won by internal lottery, a stop order lottery is selected to select a stop order as a winning condition from a plurality of different reel stop orders, and matches the stop order won in this stop order lottery On the condition that each reel is stopped in the stop order, the specific winning combination in the internal lottery can be awarded, and the stop operation of each reel is different from the stop order selected in the stop order lottery. If a specific role is won in the internal lottery, the specific role cannot be won, and when a specific role is won, the stop order won in the stop order lottery There has been proposed a slot machine in which the player's advantage varies depending on whether or not the notification is made.

  However, in the conventional slot machine, in order to determine the stop order as the winning condition from the stop order of a plurality of different reels, it is necessary to perform the stop order lottery separately from the internal lottery, and the stop order as the winning condition is determined. For this reason, there is a problem that the control becomes complicated. In addition, since the winning conditions are determined by the stop order lottery that determines only the winning conditions different from the internal lottery that determines whether or not the winning is originally allowed, there is a range of random numbers for which the specific winning conditions are selected. Because it becomes easier to identify the timing when a specific winning condition is selected by stop order lottery from the cycle of random numbers, and the possibility of fraudulent acts using this increases, it may harm the fairness of the game was there.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, RT (2) from the initial gaming state depends on whether replay GR (1) is won, replay GR (2) is won, or replay GR (3) is won. The replay GR is different in the operating procedure for avoiding the derivation of the transition display result to the first stop reel, that is, the RT (2), which will be won by a replaying player other than the replay (1) that triggers the transition to When any one of (1) to (3) is won, if the type is not known, it is not possible to select the first stop reel that a replay player other than the replay (1) will win. By utilizing this, it is possible to avoid the transition to RT (2), which is disadvantageous for the player, depending on whether or not the reel to be stopped first is notified by the stop order notification.

  In addition, since the order of the stop operation for winning a re-game player other than the replay (1) from a plurality of different orders is determined only by the internal lottery that determines whether or not the winning is allowed, The control for determining the order does not become complicated, and the game result is not influenced by the lottery result other than the internal lottery, so there is no possibility of harming the fairness of the game.

  In this embodiment, stop order notification is executed when replays GR (1) to (3) are won in the initial gaming state. In the initial gaming state, the player receives RT (2). In order to avoid the transition to the game, it is not necessary to perform a stop operation (so-called “line-up”) with an operation timing, and it is possible to increase the game digestion speed in the initial gaming state, so that the operation of the slot machine can be increased. it can.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 91a, in the initial gaming state, when the replay GR (1) to (3) is elected and when the replay GR (4) is elected, the super chance zone in which the stop order notification described above is executed ( Hereinafter, the stop zone notification is not executed when the replay GR (1) to (3) is won, and the stop order notification is executed only when the replay GR (4) is won (hereinafter referred to as SCZ) (hereinafter referred to as SCZ). , CZ)).

  In SCZ, when replay GR (1) to (3) is won, stop order notification is executed, and it is possible to specify an operation procedure for avoiding winning of replay (1) that will shift to RT (2). , While avoiding the transition to RT (2), it is possible to wait for the winning of the replay GR (4) and win the replays (8) to (9) to shift to RT (1). When controlled to SCZ, it is possible to make a transition to RT (1) with certainty by playing the game according to the stop order notification.

  In this embodiment, the reel stop order for avoiding the derivation of the transition display result to RT (2) differs depending on the combination of winning combinations, but RT (2) depends on the winning combination or combination of winning combinations. ) The timing of the reel stop operation for avoiding the derivation of the display result of transition to () may be different. In this case, transition to RT (2) according to the winning combination or combination of winning combinations in SCZ If the timing of the reel stop operation for avoiding the derivation of the display result is informed in an identifiable manner, the SCZ can be reliably shifted to RT (1) as described above.

  On the other hand, in CZ, when the replays GR (1) to (3) are won, the stop order notification is not executed, and therefore it is not possible to specify the operation procedure for avoiding the replay (1) winning. Although it is possible to avoid winning the replay (1) at a rate, the replay (1) wins at a rate of 2/3 and the process proceeds to RT (2). Even in this case, even if replays (8) to (10) are won before replay GR (1) to (3) wins, or replay GR (1) to (3) wins, replay (1) It is possible to shift to RT (1) by continuing to avoid winning and replays (8) to (10) winning before replay (1) wins.

  In this way, even if the CZ is not executed in stop order notification in the initial gaming state, it is possible to shift to RT by itself, so even if it is not controlled by the SCZ in the initial gaming state, RT (1) The expectation for moving to can be maintained.

  Furthermore, even if it is CZ at the start of the initial game state, the replay (1) is continued for 10 games without replays (8) to (10) being won, or the replay (1). However, if the replays (8) to (10) are not won and the initial game state continues and the cherries or cherries + 1 are won independently, the game will be controlled by the SCZ in that initial game state. It is like that. That is, even if it is CZ, it will be promoted to SCZ by continuing 10 games or winning cherries or cherries +1. Therefore, even if replay GR (1) to (3) is won thereafter, stop order notification Is executed and the winning of the replay (1) can be avoided, so that it is possible to surely shift to RT (1).

  The sub CPU 91a performs the SCZ lottery for determining whether to control to the SCZ, the SCZ continuation rate, and the SCZ continuous lottery for determining whether to continue the SCZ.

  In SCZ lottery, whether or not to control to SCZ by determining one of 0%, 5%, 50%, 60%, 75%, 90%, and 100% as the continuation rate by lottery (continuation rate 0% Indicates SCZ non-winning) and determines the SCZ continuation rate. That is, whether or not to control to SCZ and the continuation rate of SCZ are determined by one lottery. First, whether to control to SCZ or not is determined by the first lottery and wins SCZ In addition, the continuation rate may be determined by the second lottery.

  The SCZ lottery is performed with opportunities 1 to 6 and 8 shown in FIG. In other words, at the time of winning BB (1) or BB (2) (Trigger 1), during BB (Trigger 2), during RB (Trigger 3), CZ10 game continuation (Trigger 4), Cherry in CZ, Cherry + 1 winning (Trigger) 5) Replay during CZ (8) to (10) When winning (RT (1) transition) (Timing 6), RT (2) When reaching the ceiling (Timing 8), the SCZ lottery will be held and the next initial gaming state Whether or not to control to SCZ and the continuation rate of SCZ are determined. Further, the SCZ continuous lottery is performed at opportunity 7 shown in FIG. That is, the SCZ continuous lottery is performed at the time of SCZ replay (8) to (10) winning, and it is determined whether or not to control to SCZ again at the end of the next RT (1).

  As shown in FIG. 21, when BB (1) or BB (2) is won, SCZ lottery is performed at the time of BB winning and during BB. In addition, when RB wins, SCZ lottery is performed during RB. If the player wins the SCZ, the game is controlled to the SCZ in the initial gaming state after the end of the BB and RB. To do.

  In addition, when 10 games have elapsed after the start of CZ, or when cherry or cherry + 1 is won before 10 games have elapsed, an SCZ lottery is performed. At this time, SCZ is won at a rate of 100%, so if 10 games have passed since the start of CZ, or if Cherry or Cherry + 1 is won before 10 games have passed, it will be controlled to SCZ. To do.

  The SCZ lottery is also performed when replays (8) to (10) win in CZ. If the player wins the SCZ, the game is controlled to the SCZ in the initial gaming state after the end of the RT (1) associated with the replays (8) to (10), and if the player does not win the SCZ, the RT Control to CZ in the initial gaming state after the end of (1).

  Further, when RT (2) reaches the ceiling, that is, after the transition to RT (2), when the 999 game has passed and RT (2) is finished, the SCZ lottery is performed. At this time, since the SCZ is won at a rate of 100%, when the RT (2) reaches the ceiling and shifts to the initial gaming state, it is always controlled to the SCZ.

  In addition, when SCZ lottery is performed multiple times before entering the initial game state, such as during BB, RB, or CZ, the SCZ lottery is continued even if the SCZ is won once. In some cases, only if the continuation rate of the SCZ won later exceeds the continuation rate of the SCZ previously won, the continuation rate of the SCZ won later will be overwritten. After winning the SCZ, Even if the SCZ continuity rate is low, it does not cause any disadvantages.

  Also, after the first SCZ win in the SCZ lottery, the SCZ is based on the SCZ continuation rate determined in the SCZ lottery at the time of transition from SCZ to RT (1) (when winning the replays (8) to (10)). If a continuous lottery is to be performed and the SCZ continuous lottery is won, the game will be controlled to SCZ again in the initial game state after the end of RT (1), and if the SCZ continuous lottery is not won In the initial gaming state after the end of RT (1), control is not performed to SCZ but to CZ.

  Thus, in this embodiment, after the first SCZ win in the SCZ lottery, while the SCZ and RT (1) loop continues, the SCZ continuous lottery at the continuation rate determined in the SCZ lottery at the first hit. As the higher continuation rate is won at the first hit, the loop of SCZ and RT (1) will continue.

  In this embodiment, the SCZ continuation rate is determined by the SCZ lottery, and the SCZ continuation lottery performed at the time of the transition to RT (1) is performed based on this continuation rate, whereby the SCZ at the time of the initial hit is determined. The continuation rate determined by the lottery continues, but the SCZ lottery number is determined by the SCZ lottery, and the continuation number is subtracted every time the SCZ is controlled once, until the continuation number becomes zero. It is good also as a structure controlled to SCZ whenever it transfers to a gaming state.

  Further, in this embodiment, the right (SCZ) to notify stop order at a rate of 100% when the replay GR (1) to (3) is won over the period of one initial gaming state in the SCZ lottery. When the replay GR (1) to (3) is won until the initial game state is ended in the initial game state that has been shifted to by subsequent winning of the SCZ lottery or the SCZ continuous lottery. The stop order notification is performed at a rate of 100%, but instead of the SCZ lottery, a notification probability lottery that determines the execution probability of the stop order notification from a plurality of probabilities including 0% is executed, and then RT ( When the replay GR (1) to (3) is won in the initial gaming state until the transition to 2), the notification actuality for determining whether or not the stop order notification is executed with the execution probability won in the notification probability lottery Performs a lottery, it may be configured to perform a stop order notification when you win in this notification run lottery. Further, in place of the SCZ lottery, a notification number lottery in which the stop order notification execution number is determined from a plurality of times including 0 is executed, and then the replay GR ( When 1) to (3) are won, the stop order notification may be executed on condition that the stop order notification execution count remains, and the execution count may be subtracted every time the stop order notification is executed. .

  The sub CPU 91a executes the BB effect in the effect mode selected by the player at the time of winning the BB (1) (2) among the effect modes of the BB modes A to C as the effect during the BB described above. Specifically, when BB (1) (2) is won, the BB modes A to C are selectably displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the selected BB is touched by touching the area where the desired BB mode is displayed. The mode is set.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22, the sub CPU 91a applies different winning probabilities according to the BB mode selected by the player when performing the SCZ lottery in the BB, and in the loop of SCZ and RT (1). Otherwise, different winning probabilities are applied according to the lottery mode at the time of BB winning (the lottery mode of specific suggestion effect), and if it is in the loop of SCZ and RT (1), it differs according to the continuation rate of SCZ Apply winning probability.

  As shown in FIG. 22, when the BB is won except during the SCZ and RT (1) loop, when the lottery mode at the time of BB winning is the high probability mode, the BB is more than in the low probability mode. The winning probability of the middle SCZ is set high. As described above, in the high probability mode, the appearance frequency of the specific suggestion effect is high, and the possibility of the high probability mode is suggested by the frequent occurrence of the specific suggestion effect. Since it can be expected, the expectation for winning the SCZ can be enhanced by frequent specific suggestion effects. In addition, as described above, in the high probability mode, there is a higher probability that evening will be selected as the background image than in the low probability mode, and the expectation of winning the SCZ can also be increased by changing the background image to evening. it can.

  In addition, when BB wins in the loop of SCZ and RT (1), the higher the SCZ continuation rate, the higher the winning probability of SCZ in the BB, and SCZ and RT (1) continue. The longer the period, the higher the expectation for winning the SCZ again.

  Further, in this embodiment, as the winning probability of the internal lottery in BB (RB), the bell has the highest winning probability, and the winning probability is determined in the order of cherry, watermelon (black watermelon + white watermelon), and cherry + 1. Even if any of the BB modes (A) to (C) is selected, the winning probability of the SCZ at the time of winning the bell with the highest winning probability in the BB is low, and the winning probability compared to the bell The winning probability of SCZ winning with a low watermelon and cherry + 1 is applied, so the expectation for winning the SCZ can be increased when winning a watermelon with a low appearance rate or when the cherry stops in the middle . Also, in the BB mode (C), the winning probability of SCZ at the time of winning of watermelon and cherry +1 sheet is lower than in the BB mode (A) (B), but compared with the BB mode (A) (B). Since the winning probability of SCZ at the time of winning the bell is high and the winning of the bell with a high appearance rate can be expected, the winning of the SCZ can always be expected during the BB. In the BB mode (B), when the cherry + 1 is won, the SCZ is won with a probability of 100%. Therefore, the winning of the SCZ is confirmed when the cherry stops at the middle stage of the left reel or the right reel. .

  When the BB mode (A) is selected, the sub CPU 91a executes the SCZ suggestion effect that suggests the possibility of winning the SCZ according to the timing at which the effect is executed in the game in the BB.

  The SCZ suggestion effect includes 12 types of patterns, and the sub CPU 91a selects any one of these 12 types of patterns in the BB, and executes the SCZ suggestion effect based on the selected pattern.

  The pattern of the SCZ suggestion effect is (1) No effect, (2) Until the first stop, (3) Until the second stop, (4) Third stop + bronze medal display, (5) Third stop + silver medal display, ( 6) Third stop + gold medal display, (7) Second and third stop + bronze medal display, (8) Second and third stop + silver medal display, (9) Second and third stop + gold medal display, (10 There are twelve types: a bronze medal display at the end of the BB until the second stop, (11) a silver medal display at the end of the BB until the second stop, and (11) a gold medal display at the end of the BB until the second stop.

  As shown in FIG. 23, these SCZ suggestion effect patterns are selected with a probability corresponding to a winning combination in a game when SCZ is not won, and are selected with a probability according to a continuation rate in a game when winning SCZ. .

  In a game when SCZ is not won, the probability that (1) no effect or (2) first stop pattern will be selected at the time of winning a loss or bell that cannot be expected to win SCZ, and (1) the probability that (1) no effect will be selected. Is expensive. In addition, in the case of watermelon or cherry + 1 that can be expected to win SCZ, (3) only the first stop and second stop patterns are selected.

  In the game at the time of winning the SCZ, (4) to (6) third stop + medal display, (7) to (9) second and third stop + medal display, (10) to (12) until the second stop, Since one of the BB end medal displays is selected according to the SCZ continuation rate, the SCZ continuation rate can be estimated from the SCZ suggestion effect pattern. For example, when the continuation rate is 60%, 75%, and 90%, the effects are performed at the patterns (7) to (9), that is, at the timing of the first stop, as compared with the continuation rates of 5% and 50%. The pattern is produced at the timing of the second stop and the third stop, the patterns (10) to (12), that is, the effect is performed until the second stop, and then the winning of the SCZ is announced until the end of the BB. The ratio at which patterns that never occur is selected is high, and the SCZ suggestion effect based on the patterns (7) to (9) or the patterns (10) to (12) is executed. It can be expected that the continuation rate of 60%, 75%, and 90% are won more than 50%. When the continuation rate is 5% or 50%, the patterns of (4) to (6), that is, the first stop and the second stop are higher than the continuation rates of 60%, 75%, and 90%. The pattern in which the effect is not performed at the timing and the effect is performed at the timing of the third stop is selected, but when the continuation rate is 100%, the ratio of the patterns (4) to (6) being selected is the continuation rate of 5%. Therefore, when the SCZ suggestion effect based on the patterns (4) to (6) is executed, the continuation rate is 5% and the possibility of 50% is high. It can be expected that 100% is elected.

  As described above, if the SCZ is controlled based on the SCZ continuation count, the SCZ suggestion effect pattern is selected with a probability corresponding to the continuation count in the game at the time of winning the SCZ. The number of SCZ continuations can be estimated from the pattern of the SCZ suggestion effect. Further, if the stop order notification is executed with the execution probability won in the notification probability lottery, the SCZ suggestion effect pattern is selected with the probability corresponding to the stop order notification execution probability won in the notification probability lottery. By doing so, it becomes possible to estimate the execution probability of stop order notification from the pattern of the SCZ suggestion effect. Further, if the stop order notification is executed based on the stop order notification execution count, the SCZ suggestion effect pattern is selected with a probability corresponding to the stop order notification execution count selected in the notification count lottery. By doing so, it is possible to estimate the number of stop order notification executions from the SCZ suggestion effect pattern.

  In addition, in the patterns of (4) to (9) among the patterns of the SCZ suggesting effects selected in the game at the time of winning the SCZ, the effects are not performed at the timing of the first stop, and the timing of the third stop or the second stop In contrast, when the SCZ non-winning game is performed at the timing of the third stop, when the SCZ suggestion is performed, the performance is always performed at the timing of the first stop. When the production starts from the stop, the winning of the SCZ is confirmed.

  In the patterns (10) to (12), an effect is performed until the second stop, and after that, the winning of the SCZ is not announced until the end of the BB. Since there is no difference from the pattern (3) that may be selected in step 3, if the stage is played until the second stop, even if there is no stage at the timing of the third stop, I can expect. In particular, in the game when the SCZ is not won, the pattern (3) is selected at the time of winning the watermelon or cherry + 1 that can be expected to win the SCZ. Even if there is no performance at the timing, in a game where the performance is performed until the second stop, there is a possibility that a watermelon that can be expected to win the SCZ wins or a cherry stops at the middle stage of the left reel or the right reel, that is, the SCZ Since there is a high possibility that the winning result is a display result, it is possible to effectively expect the winning of the SCZ.

  Further, the pattern selected in the SCZ winning game is a pattern in which medals are displayed by the end of the BB, and the winning of the SCZ is notified by the display of the medals. Further, the patterns (4), (7), and (10) in which bronze medals are displayed by the end of BB may be selected at any continuation rate except for the continuation rate of 100%, but by the end of BB Patterns (5), (8), and (11) in which silver medals are displayed are selected only when the continuation rate is 60% or more, and gold medals are displayed by the end of BB (6), (9), and (12) patterns Is selected only when the continuation rate is 75% or more, so that not only the winning of the SCZ is notified by displaying the medal before the end of the BB, but also the color of the medal displayed before the end of the BB This also suggests the continuation rate of SCZ.

  When the BB mode (B) is selected and the sub CPU 91a wins the SCZ in the game in the BB, the sub CPU 91a executes the SCZ winning notification at the end of the game.

  The SCZ winning notification is composed of three types of patterns: (1) bronze medal display, (2) silver medal display, and (3) gold medal display. The sub CPU 91a can select any of these three patterns when winning the SCZ in BB. This pattern is selected, and SCZ winning notification is executed based on the selected pattern.

  These SCZ winning notification patterns are selected with a probability corresponding to the continuation rate, as shown in FIG. The pattern (1) in which a bronze medal is displayed may be selected at any continuation rate except for the continuation rate 100%, but the pattern (2) in which a silver medal is displayed has a continuation rate of 60% or more. The pattern of (3) in which the gold medal is displayed only when the medals are selected is displayed only when the medal is displayed, so that the winning of the SCZ is not only notified but also displayed. The continuation rate of SCZ is also suggested by the color of the medal.

  Note that, as described above, if the SCZ is controlled based on the number of SCZ continuations, the SCZ winning notification pattern is selected with a probability corresponding to the number of continuations. From this, it is possible to estimate the number of continuations of SCZ. Further, if the stop order notification is executed with the execution probability won in the notification probability lottery, the SCZ winning notification pattern is selected with a probability corresponding to the execution probability of the stop order notification won in the notification probability lottery. By doing so, it is possible to estimate the execution probability of stop order notification from the SCZ winning notification pattern. Further, if the stop order notification is performed based on the number of times of stop order notification, the SCZ winning notification pattern is selected with a probability corresponding to the number of stop order notifications selected in the notification number lottery. By doing so, it is possible to estimate the number of stop order notification executions from the SCZ winning notification pattern.

  When the BB mode (C) is selected, the sub CPU 91a executes a roulette effect that informs whether or not the SCZ is won at the end of the BB.

  In the roulette effect, at the start of the production, a combination of three of the symbols “Bronze medal”, “Silver medal”, “Gold medal” and “CHANCE” is displayed, and then one of the displayed symbols is displayed in sequence. If the symbol that is finally displayed is one of “Bronze medal”, “Silver medal”, or “Gold medal”, the fact that the SCZ has been won is notified, and the symbol that is finally displayed is “CHANCE”. For example, it is an effect informing that the SCZ is not won.

  The combination and display order of the symbols displayed at the start of the production are determined in advance, and the sub CPU 91a selects the combination and display order of the symbols with the probability depending on whether or not the SCZ is won. The combinations are displayed in the selected display order.

  As shown in FIG. 25, there are 35 types of symbol combinations and display order patterns. Among these patterns, patterns (1) to (9) are patterns in which “CHANCE” is finally displayed. Selected if you are not elected. The pattern shown in FIG. 25 indicates the order in which symbols are displayed, and the combination of symbols in which the three symbols on the left are displayed at the start of production. The order of (10) to (35) is a pattern in which any one of “Bronze Medal”, “Silver Medal”, and “Gold Medal” is finally displayed, and is selected when the SCZ is won.

  Furthermore, these patterns (10) to (35) are selected with a probability corresponding to the continuation rate of SCZ, as shown in FIG.

  That is, in the BB mode (C), the combination of symbols and the display order are selected with a probability according to whether or not the SCZ is won, and if the SCZ is won, the continuation rate is selected. Since the combination of symbols and display order are selected with probability, the winning combination of SCZ can be estimated and the expected continuation rate can be estimated without waiting for the final result by the combination of symbols displayed at the start of production. Each time one is displayed, the winning possibility of SCZ and the expected continuation rate change.

  In the roulette effect, the combination of symbols and the display order are selected with a probability corresponding to the continuation rate of the SCZ, whether or not the SCZ is won. Either one of the symbol combinations and the display order may be selected with a probability corresponding to the SCZ continuation rate.

  In addition, as described above, if the configuration is controlled to SCZ based on the number of continuations of SCZ, the combination of symbols and the display order are selected with a probability corresponding to the number of continuations, so that the display is made at the start of production. The possibility of winning the SCZ and the expected number of continuations can be estimated without waiting for the final result by the combination of the symbols made, and the possibility of winning the SCZ and the expected number of continuations can be estimated each time one symbol is displayed. Can be changed. Further, if the stop order notification is executed with the execution probability won in the notification probability lottery, the combination of symbols and the display order are selected with a probability corresponding to the execution probability of the stop order notification selected in the notification probability lottery. By doing so, it is possible to estimate the possibility of winning the SCZ, the expected execution probability of stop order notification without waiting for the final result by the combination of symbols displayed at the start of the production, and one symbol The execution probability of the stop order notification that can be expected each time it is displayed can be changed. Further, if the stop order notification is executed based on the number of stop order notifications, the combination of symbols and the display order are selected with a probability corresponding to the number of stop order notifications won in the notification number lottery. By doing so, it is possible to guess the possibility of winning the SCZ and the expected number of stop order notifications without waiting for the final result by the combination of symbols displayed at the start of the production, and one symbol is displayed. It is possible to change the number of executions of stop order notification that can be expected each time.

  In addition, the pattern in which the “silver medal” is finally displayed is selected only when the continuation rate is 60% or more, and the pattern in which the “gold medal” is finally displayed is selected only when the continuation rate is 75% or more. Therefore, the SCZ winning is not only informed by the final display of the medals, but also the continuation rate of the SCZ is suggested by the color of the medals that are finally displayed.

  In the patterns (1) to (9), that is, the pattern selected when the SCZ is not won, “CHANCE” is always displayed by the third position, but is selected only when the SCZ is won ( In the patterns 28) to (35), since “CHANCE” is not displayed until the third, “CHANCE” is displayed until the third, that is, a symbol indicating SCZ non-winning is displayed when finally displayed. Failure to do so will confirm the winning of the SCZ at that time.

  In addition, in the patterns (10) to (35), that is, the patterns selected at the time of winning the SCZ, there are combinations of symbols that do not include “CHANCE”, and when such a pattern is selected, when the production starts Will win the SCZ.

  In addition, there is a combination of symbols that does not include a “Bronze Medal”. In this case, although it is premised that the winner is SCZ, a continuation rate of 60% or more of the SCZ can be expected at the start of the production. If it is a combination of symbols that does not include “CHANCE”, SCZ is won and a continuation rate of 60% or more is determined.

  In addition, when the SCZ is not won, the pattern (1) to (34) is selected even when the SCZ is won but the continuation rate is lower than 90%. “Bronze medal” and “CHANCE” are always displayed, but in the pattern of (35), which is selected on the condition that the SCZ is won and the continuation rate is 90% or more, all “ Since the “gold medal” is displayed, if all the symbols displayed up to the third are “gold medals”, it is determined that the player wins SCZ and the continuation rate is 90% or more. In particular, when the continuation rate is 100%, only the pattern (35) is selected, and only when the symbols displayed up to the third are all “gold medals”, the continuation rate is 100%, that is, SCZ and RT (1) until the next bonus. ) The continuation rate at which the loop is confirmed can be expected.

  In addition, in the patterns (1) to (34) that are selected even when the SCZ is won and the continuation rate is lower than 90% even if the SCZ is won, the pattern displayed at the start of the production is always used. In the pattern (35), which is selected on the condition that a symbol other than “Gold Medal” is included but SCZ is won and the continuation rate is 90% or more, it is displayed at the start of production. Since all the symbols to be displayed are “gold medals”, when all the symbols displayed at the start of the production are “gold medals”, it is determined that the winner is SCZ and the continuation rate is 90% or more. Become. In particular, when the continuation rate is 100%, only the pattern of (35) is selected, and only when the symbols displayed at the start of the production are all “gold medals”, the continuation rate is 100%, that is, SCZ and RT (1 ) The continuation rate at which the loop is confirmed can be expected.

  Further, in the patterns (1) to (9), that is, the patterns selected when the SCZ is not won, the patterns ((1) (2) (4) (5) ( 7) The ratio (937/997) in which the order of (8) is selected selects the pattern (the order of (3) (6) (9)) in which symbols other than “bronze medal” are displayed by the third. In the patterns (10) to (35) that are lower than the ratio (60/997), that is, the pattern selected when the SCZ is won, a pattern other than the “bronze medal” is displayed by the third (( 14) (15) (26) (27) (33) to (35)) is selected on condition that the continuation rate is 60% or more, so “CHANCE” is displayed by the third. Is not displayed as “Bronze Medal”. In terms of Z winning can be expected, it can be expected also for that it is elected to more than 60% continuation rate.

  In the BB mode (C), when the SCZ is not won and neither the watermelon nor the cherry + 1 is won during the BB, the combination of symbols and the display order are changed with the probability shown in FIG. Select, but if SCZ is not won and one of watermelon and cherry + one is won more than once during BB, a pattern that displays symbols other than “Bronze medal” by the third ( (3) (6) (9) pattern) is selected, a higher probability applies than when neither watermelon nor cherry +1 was won during BB, and SCZ won When a watermelon that can be expected is won or when the cherry can stop at the middle of the left reel or right reel, it is easy to select a pattern that is likely to be won by the SCZ. Depending effectively can be expected the winning of SCZ in.

  In this way, in this embodiment, as the winning probability of SCZ according to the internal lottery result in BB, different winning probabilities are applied depending on the difference of the BB mode selected by the player, so that the player actively participates in the game. You can raise awareness that you are participating.

  Also, due to the difference in the BB mode selected by the player, the SCZ winning notification is also performed at different timings, and the SCZ winning probability for each SCZ winning role and the timing at which the SCZ winning notification is notified. Can be relevant to qualification. For example, in this embodiment, as in the BB mode (A) (B), when the role that can be expected to win the SCZ is extremely biased to some roles such as watermelon or cherry + 1, that is, during BB The chances of winning an SCZ in Japan are extremely biased, and if there is almost no chance of winning an SCZ without winning a watermelon or cherry + one, there is a high percentage of notifications to that effect when winning the SCZ. As in BB mode (C), compared to BB mode (A) and (B), you cannot expect to win SCZ when winning a watermelon or cherry +1, but also when winning a role other than watermelon or cherry +1 If you can expect to win SCZ, that is, if you can expect to win SCZ evenly during BB, you will be notified of SCZ winning at the end of BB, not at the time of winning SCZ. And in the, BB during the time of, has always been to be able to sustain a sense of expectation for the winner of the SCZ.

  In this embodiment, the SCZ lottery is performed regardless of the winning combination in any BB mode. However, the trigger for performing the SCZ lottery differs according to the BB mode selected by the player. Also good.

  For example, when the BB mode A is selected, the SCZ lottery is executed when the bell with the highest winning probability is won during the BB, and when the BB effect mode B is selected, during the BB When the bell is not won, that is, when a role other than the bell is won, or when the player loses, the SCZ lottery is executed with a winning probability of 100%, and the BB effect mode C is selected. When the bell is elected, the first stop reel is randomly determined from left, middle, and right, and when the reel that is first stopped by the player matches the predetermined first stop reel, the SCZ It is good also as a structure which performs a lottery.

  In the above configuration, when the BB mode (A) is selected and the SCZ lottery is won, that is, when the SCZ lottery is won at the time of winning the bell with the highest probability of winning, the SCZ is won at the end of the BB. When the BB mode (B) is selected and the SCZ lottery is won, that is, when the bell is not won, the fact that the SCZ is won immediately is notified at that time, and BB When mode (C) is selected and the SCZ lottery is won, that is, when the first stop reel randomly selected by the bell matches the first stop reel selected by the player, the SCZ lottery In the case of winning, the Bell won and won the SCZ with a certain probability when the randomly determined first stop reel and the first stop reel selected by the player matched. If the SCZ lottery opportunity differs according to the BB mode, such as notifying the SCZ when the BB ends, if the notification is not made before the end of the BB, the BB mode is supported. It is preferable that the winning of the SCZ is notified at the timing, and by doing so, the timing of the SCZ lottery and the timing of notifying the winning can be properly associated.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 91a performs the SCZ lottery for determining whether or not to control to the SCZ during the BB as described above, and after the BB starts, the total payout number in the BB is determined in advance. It is configured to end only on the condition that the upper limit (300 in this embodiment) has been exceeded, and SCZ is delayed by delaying the end of the BB without winning a prize when winning a winning combination such as cherry or watermelon. Since the chances of lottery increase, there is a possibility that the operation rate may be lowered due to unnecessary delay of the end of the BB.

  For this reason, the sub CPU 91a of this embodiment counts the number of games after the start of the BB, performs an SCZ lottery until the number of games that have elapsed since the start of the BB reaches a specified value (25 games in the present embodiment), and starts the BB The SCZ lottery is not performed when the number of games that have passed since exceeds a specified value. In other words, the SCZ lottery in BB is performed on condition that the number of games that have passed since the start of BB does not exceed the specified value, and the games for SCZ lottery are limited, so it is unnecessary to dare to miss a missing role Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operation of the slot machine from being lowered by delaying the end of the BB.

  In this embodiment, the number of games in which the SCZ lottery is performed in the BB (specified value) is the minimum number of games required for the total number of payouts in the BB to exceed the upper limit (in this embodiment, a maximum of 15 games per game). If there are less than 15 small roles in the BB, the number of games is larger than the upper limit of 300, which requires a minimum of 21 games. If the BB is not finished with the minimum number of games without the player's intention, such as when he or she accidentally misses a small role, a maximum of 4 games can receive the SCZ lottery, and small It is possible to increase the chances of up to 4 games and SCZ lottery by losing a role. In other words, if the end of the BB is extremely delayed, it will be disadvantageous to the player, but if it is delayed somewhat, it will be advantageous to the player, and a strategy element will be added depending on how the game in the BB is advanced. Can do.

  Further, in the above, the sub CPU 91a performs the SCZ lottery according to the number of games after the start of the BB, but the total payout in the BB when it is considered that all the winning combinations during the BB are considered winning. SCZ lottery is performed until the total number of payouts in the BB reaches a specified value (for example, 375), when the number is counted, and all the winning combinations in the BB are considered to have won. When the total number of payouts in the BB exceeds the specified value when all the combinations are considered to have won the prize, the SCZ lottery is not performed, that is, the SCZ lottery in the BB wins all the winning combinations in the BB A configuration may be made on condition that the total number of payouts in the BB when it is regarded as not exceeding a specified value, and even in such a configuration, B In addition to preventing the slot machine from declining due to a delay in the end of the game, if a player plays less than 15 small roles in the BB, or if the player loses the small role unintentionally, Even if the BB is not finished with the minimum number of games unintentionally, the SCZ lottery can be surely received until the BB is finished.

  Further, in the above configuration, it is preferable that a value larger than the upper limit value (300 sheets in the present embodiment) at which the BB ends is set as the specified value for performing the SCZ lottery in the BB. It is possible to increase the chances of the SCZ lottery by losing out the small roles as long as the total number of payouts in the BB does not exceed the specified value when it is considered that all the winning characters in the BB are won. Therefore, if the end of the BB is extremely delayed, it will be disadvantageous to the player, but it will be advantageous to the player if the delay is somewhat delayed, and a strategy element will be added depending on how the game in the BB is advanced. Can be increased.

  Further, as described above, the sub CPU 91a performs the SCZ lottery at the time of winning the BB in addition to the BB as described above, that is, at the timing before shifting to the BB, and on the condition that the SCZ is won at the time of winning the BB. As a medium production, a production during BB is executed only when the player wins the SCZ at the time of winning the BB. When the player does not win the SCZ at the time of winning the BB, the production during the SCZ finalized BB is executed. In most cases, SCZ is won during the BB, but if an effect during the SCZ finalization BB is performed during the BB, it is not necessary to wait for the SCZ lottery during the BB. Since it is determined that the SCZ is won at the same time as the start of the production, it is possible to give the player an unexpected feeling.

  When the remaining number of games of RT (1) reaches the predetermined number of games (six games in this embodiment), the sub CPU 91a of the present embodiment plays a special role until the end of RT (1), that is, the predetermined number of games. A battle effect that suggests the possibility of winning and the continuity of SCZ is executed.

  In the battle effect, as shown in FIG. 26, in the first game, first, an opening effect (1) in which the enemy character and the teammate character face each other is executed. In the second game, either the enemy character appearance effect (2-A) indicating the attack of the enemy character or the teammate character appearance effect (2-B) indicating the attack of the friend character is entered, and the second game is the enemy character. In the case of the appearance effect (2-A), a weak attack effect (3-A) in which the enemy character makes a weak attack in the third game, or a strong attack effect in which the enemy character makes a stronger attack than the weak attack ( Transition to any one of 3-B).

  As shown in FIG. 27, when the third game is a weak attack production (3-A), a teammate HIT production (4-A, 4-A ′) in which a weak attack hits an ally in the fourth game, Move to either a teammate avoidance effect (4-B) to avoid a weak attack or a special avoidance effect (4-C) to catch a weak attack, and the fourth game is a teammate HIT effect (4-A, 4-A ') In the case of the fifth game, the process shifts to either a team-friendly effect (5-A) that can withstand enemy attacks or a teammate KO effect (5-B) knocked out (KO) by the enemy attack.

  When the fifth game is an effect (5-A) for enduring a teammate, the process shifts to an SCZ continuous notification effect (6-A) for notifying that the SCZ will continue in the final game (the sixth game), and the battle effect is displayed. When the 5th game is a teammate KO production (5-B), CZ is notified that the player will enter the CZ in the final game (6th game) and that the special role will not be won and the SCZ will not continue. The battle effect is terminated by transitioning to one of the rush effect (6-B) and the resurrection → bonus confirmation effect (6-C, 6-C ′) informing that the special role has been won.

  When the 4th game is an ally avoidance effect (4-B), the game shifts to an opposition effect 1 (5-C) that confronts the enemy in the 5th game, and the SCZ continues in the final game (6th game). It shifts to the SCZ continuation notification effect (6-A) for notifying the effect, and the battle effect is ended.

  When the 4th game is a teammate special avoidance effect (4-C), the game shifts to an opposition effect 2 (5-D) that confronts the enemy in the 5th game, and the SCZ continues in the final game (6th game). It transfers to SCZ continuation alerting | reporting effect (6-A) which alert | reports that it does, and a battle effect is complete | finished.

  As shown in FIG. 28, when the third game is a strong attack production (3-B), a teammate HIT production (4-D, 4-D ′) in which a strong attack hits an ally in the fourth game, Move to either a teammate avoidance effect (4-E) to avoid a strong attack or a special avoidance effect (4-F) to catch a strong attack, and the fourth game is a teammate HIT effect (4-D, 4-D ') If it is, the process shifts to either a team-friendly production (5-A) or a teammate KO production (5-B) in the fifth game.

  If the 5th game is a team-friendly production (5-A), the final game (6th game) is shifted to the SCZ continuous notification production (6-A), the battle production is terminated, and the 5th game is a teammate. In the case of the KO effect (5-B), in the final game (sixth game), transition is made to either the CZ rush effect (6-B) or the revival → bonus confirmation effect (6-C, 6-C ′). And the battle production ends.

  When the 4th game is an ally avoidance effect (4-E), the game shifts to an opposition effect 3 (5-E) that confronts the enemy in the 5th game, and an SCZ continuous notification effect in the final game (6th game). The process proceeds to (6-A), and the battle effect ends.

  When the 4th game is a teammate special avoidance effect (4-F), the game shifts to an opposition effect 4 (5-F) that confronts the enemy in the 5th game, and the SCZ continuation notification is made in the final game (6th game). It shifts to production (6-A) and ends the battle production.

  As shown in FIG. 26, when the second game is a teammate character appearance effect (2-B), a weak attack effect (3-C) in which the teammate character makes a weak attack in the third game, and the teammate character is weak. The process shifts to either a strong attack effect (3-D) in which a strong attack stronger than the attack is performed or a special attack effect (3-E) in which the teammate character performs a special attack more powerful than the strong attack.

  As shown in FIG. 29, when the third game is a weak attack production (3-C), an enemy HIT production (4-G, 4-G ′) in which a weak attack hits an enemy in the fourth game, If any of the enemy avoidance effects (4-H) to avoid a weak attack and the fourth game is an enemy HIT effect (4-G, 4-G ′), knockout (KO) ) Enemy KO effect (5-G) to be transferred to one of the enemy endurance effects (5-H) that endure the attack of the teammate in the fifth game.

  If the 5th game is an enemy KO effect (5-G), the game shifts to a bonus confirmation effect (6-C) indicating that a special role is won in the final game (6th game). When the fifth game is an enemy-bearing effect (5-H), the process shifts to the SCZ continuation notification effect (6-A) in the final game (sixth game), and the battle effect ends.

  When the 4th game is an enemy avoidance effect (4-H), the game shifts to an opposition effect 5 (5-I) that confronts the enemy in the 5th game, and the SCZ continuation notification effect in the final game (6th game). The process proceeds to (6-A), and the battle effect ends.

  As shown in FIG. 30, when the third game is a strong attack effect (3-D), an enemy HIT effect (4-I, 4-G ′) in which a strong attack hits the enemy in the fourth game, If the game shifts to one of the enemy avoidance effects (4-J) to avoid a strong attack and the fourth game is an enemy HIT effect (4-I, 4-G ′), the enemy KO effect is produced in the fifth game. (5-G), shift to any of the enemy-bearing effects (5-H).

  If the fifth game is an enemy-bearing effect (5-H), the SCZ continuous notification effect (6-A) is entered in the final game (sixth game), the battle effect is terminated, and the fifth game is the enemy In the case of the KO effect (5-G), in the final game (sixth game), the process shifts to the bonus confirmation effect (6-C ′) and ends the battle effect.

  When the 4th game is an enemy avoidance effect (4-J), the game shifts to an opposition effect 5 (5-I) that confronts the enemy in the 5th game, and the SCZ continuation notification is made in the final game (6th game). It shifts to production (6-A) and ends the battle production.

  As shown in FIG. 31, when the third game is a special attack production (3-E), the special attack is an enemy HIT production (4-K, 4-G ′) that hits the enemy in the fourth game. The process shifts to the enemy KO effect (5-G) in the fifth game, and shifts to the bonus confirmation effect (6-C ′) in the final game to end the battle effect.

  In this embodiment, the enemy and teammates are played once during the battle performance, but the enemy and teammates battled multiple times during the period of the battle performance. It may be an effect that leads to the final result.

  In addition, in this embodiment, a battle production in which an enemy and a friend fight as an effect suggesting the possibility of winning a special role and the continuity of SCZ at the end of RT (1) is exemplified. The game may be a competition production in which the opponent and the ally compete in a game such as a card game, or a mission production that achieves a given purpose.

  As shown in FIG. 32, the combination pattern of the contents of the effects constituting each game of the battle effects is determined in advance, and the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not the special role is won at the start of the battle effect. If the player has not won the SCZ, whether or not he / she has won the SCZ continuous lottery at the start of RT (1) at which the battle effect is performed, and if the winner has won the SCZ continuous lottery, An effect combination pattern selection process for selecting any combination pattern from a plurality of combination patterns with a probability corresponding to the continuation rate is performed, and an effect of each game constituting the battle game is executed based on the combination pattern of the selected effect contents .

  In the effect combination pattern selection process, as shown in FIG. 32, when any special role is won, the pattern in which the ally wins finally is selected, and any special role is not won. If you have won the continuous lottery, the pattern will be selected that will not win or defeat your teammates, and if you do not win any special role, you will not win the SCZ continuous lottery. As a result, the pattern that the ally loses is selected, and if the ally finally wins, the winning of the special role is notified, and if the ally does not win or lose, the SCZ will continue Will be notified, and if the team is defeated, the special role is not won and the SCZ will not continue (entering the CZ).

  Thus, in the battle performance performed at the end of RT (1), both the possibility of winning the special role and the possibility of continuation of the SCZ are suggested. In addition to raising the player's expectation for winning the special role at the end, even if the special role is not won, continue to SCZ, that is, transition to RT (2) in the initial initial gaming state It is possible to increase the player's expectation that the right to make a transition to RT (1) again is granted.

  Also, in this embodiment, the special role was not won at the start of the battle production, but when the special role is won during the battle production, the production is performed based on the combination pattern initially selected. As a final result, once the continuation of the SCZ or entry into the CZ is notified once, the winning of the special role is notified after the next game, and it is more advantageous when the continuation of the SCZ is notified. When it is informed that a transition to a high gaming state is permitted and a CZ entry is informed, a transition from a low advantage state to a high advantage state is permitted. Since the effect is notified, the interest can be further enhanced as compared with the case where the winning of the special role is notified from the beginning.

  Also, in the effect combination pattern selection process, the first branch is made according to the effect combination pattern among the effects of each game constituting the battle effect on the condition that the special role is won or the SCZ continuation is won. In the production of the second game, the combination patterns (3) to (9) in which the teammate appearance production is executed are selected. Since either the winning or the continuation of the SCZ is confirmed, it is possible to attract the player's attention from the initial stage of the battle performance.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, either the special role winning or the continuation of the SCZ is performed by the fact that the teammate appearance effect indicating the attack of the teammate is executed, that is, the battle effect starts from an advantageous development for the player side (the teammate side). Therefore, the development of the production and the content shown by the production result finally shown are the same, and the content shown by the battle production is easy to understand.

  In this embodiment, either the special role winning or the continuation of the SCZ is determined according to the production pattern of the second game that branches first according to the production combination pattern, but at least the first half of the battle production. If either the special role winning or the continuation of the SCZ is determined according to the production pattern up to, the player's attention can be drawn from the initial stage of the battle production.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the battle production where the enemy and the ally fight, the ally appearance production showing the attack of the ally is executed, that is, the battle production starts from an advantageous development for the player side (ally side) Either the special role winning or the continuation of SCZ is confirmed, but when the above-mentioned competitive production is applied, the ally is leading the enemy or the number of competing enemies is small From the advantageous development such as, it is sufficient to determine whether the special role is won or the SCZ is continued. In addition, when the game effect is applied, it is only necessary to determine whether to win the special role or to continue the SCZ from an advantageous development such as a hand that is advantageous to a teammate in poker or blackjack. . In addition, when the mission effect is applied, it may be determined whether the special role is won or the continuation of the SCZ is determined based on an advantageous development such as an objective that can be clearly achieved.

  Further, in the effect combination pattern selection process, when SCZ continuation is won, the probability according to the continuation rate of the SCZ won at the first hit of the SCZ, that is, the probability that the SCZ will continue again after the end of RT (1). Since the effect combination pattern of the battle effect is selected and the continuation rate of RT (1) can be estimated by the expansion of the executed battle effect, the loop of RT (1) and SCZ continues. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for this.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, patterns with different combinations of performance contents of the respective games constituting the battle effect change according to the SCZ continuation rate, so that RT (1) and SCZ are followed step by step for each game during the battle effect. Since the loop continuation rate can be estimated, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the battle production.

  As described above, if the SCZ is controlled based on the SCZ continuation count, the SCZ continuation count, that is, the loop of RT (1) and SCZ can be continued when the SCZ continues. It is preferable to select an effect combination pattern of battle effects with a probability corresponding to the possible number of times, and in this way, the loop of RT (1) and SCZ can be continued by the development of the executed battle effects. Since the possible number of times can be estimated, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the loop of RT (1) and SCZ will continue. Further, if the stop order notification is executed with the execution probability won in the notification probability lottery, it is preferable to select the effect combination pattern of the battle effect with a probability according to the execution probability of the stop order notification, as described above. By doing so, the execution probability of stop order notification can be estimated from the development of the executed battle effect, so that the player's expectation that the loop of RT (1) and SCZ will continue is sharpened. be able to. Further, if the stop order notification is performed based on the number of times of stop order notification, it is preferable to select the effect combination pattern of the battle effect with a probability according to the remaining number of executions of the stop order notification. By doing so, it is possible to infer the remaining number of executions of the stop order notification by developing the battle effect that has been executed, so the player's expectation that the loop of RT (1) and SCZ will continue is sharp. Can be made.

  Also, in the effect combination pattern selection process, when the SCZ continuation is won, the continuation rate of the SCZ won at the first hit of the SCZ, that is, the probability that the SCZ will continue again after the end of RT (1) is greater than or equal to a predetermined probability. (In this embodiment, on the condition that the continuation rate is 60% or more), the enemy strong attack, that is, the strong attack that is easy to receive when the special role is not won and the SCZ is not continued The combination patterns (11), (13), and (15) that are not defeated are selected, and the battle effect based on these combination patterns is executed, so that the SCZ continuation rate is greater than or equal to a predetermined probability. In other words, after the end of RT, there is a high probability that it will be controlled again by SCZ, and it is determined that RT (1) and the SCZ loop are likely to continue over a long period of time, so RT (1) Along with the loop can give both a sense of security and sense of superiority to be long-term continuation of the SCZ, it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation to be able to win a lot of medals in the meantime.

  In particular, in this embodiment, on the condition that the SCZ continuation rate is a predetermined probability or more (in this example, the continuation rate is 60% or more), a strong attack and a weak attack having different attack powers are received from the enemy. Even if it is a case, the pattern that the ally does not defeat is selected, and despite the strong attack of the enemy, it still does not lose, that is, the ally's defense is high and the ally is struck If it is strong, it is determined that there is a high possibility that the loop of RT (1) and SCZ will continue for such a long period of time, so the development of the battle production matches the content (loop continuation rate) indicated by it. In other words, the contents shown by the battle performance are easy to understand.

  In this embodiment, as a difference in attack, a punch is applied in a weak attack and a kick is applied in a strong attack. However, for example, the difference in weapons (color and type, etc.), the size, and the technique used in the attack For example, the attack power may vary.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the enemy does not defeat despite the strong attack, that is, when the ally's defense is high and the ally is strong, the RT (1) and SCZ loops for a long period of time. However, if the above-mentioned competitive performance is applied, it may not be defeated by high-level enemies or the opponent may be defeated. In such a case, it may be determined that there is a high possibility that the loop of RT (1) and SCZ will continue for such a long period of time. In addition, when the game effect is applied, the loop of RT (1) and SCZ is likely to continue for such a long period of time if the hand handed to the enemy is strong but does not lose. It is sufficient that the effect is confirmed. In addition, when the mission effect is applied, it is sufficient to determine that it is highly likely that the loop of RT (1) and SCZ will continue for a long period of time when a highly difficult purpose is achieved. .

  In addition, as described above, if the SCZ is controlled based on the SCZ continuation count, when the SCZ continues, the SCZ remaining continuation count, that is, the loop of RT (1) and SCZ can be continued. It is preferable that the combination patterns (11), (13), and (15) not finally defeated by the enemy strong attack are selected on condition that the number of possible times is a predetermined number or more. By executing the battle effect based on the above, the SCZ continuation count is greater than or equal to the predetermined number of times, that is, after the end of RT, there is a high probability that it will be controlled again by SCZ, and the loop of RT (1) and SCZ over a long period Therefore, it is possible to give both a sense of security and a sense of superiority that the loop of RT (1) and SCZ will continue for a long period of time, and a large amount of It is possible to enhance the sense of expectation to be able to win the Le.

  In addition, if the stop order notification is executed with the execution probability won in the notification probability lottery, finally, the execution probability of the stop order notification is not less than a predetermined probability, and finally against the enemy strong attack It is preferable that the combination patterns (11), (13), and (15) that are not defeated are selected, and the execution effect of the stop order notification is greater than or equal to a predetermined probability by executing a battle effect based on these combination patterns. Will be able to give both the sense of security and superiority that the RT (1) and SCZ loops will continue for a long time, and to increase the expectation that a large number of medals can be obtained during that time. it can.

  In addition, if the stop order notification is executed based on the stop order notification execution count, it is finally defeated against the enemy's strong attack on condition that the stop order notification execution count is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. No (11) (13) (15) combination patterns are preferably selected, and the execution of the battle effect based on these combination patterns may cause the stop order notification to be executed a predetermined number of times or more. Since it is confirmed, it can give both a sense of security and a sense of superiority that the RT (1) and SCZ loops will continue for a long period of time, and increase the expectation that a large number of medals can be obtained during that time. .

  Further, in the effect combination pattern selection process, when any of the special roles is won, the ally performs a strong attack or the ally performs a special attack (4) (5) (17) ratio (497) for selecting the combination pattern / 977) is higher than the ratio (5/977 to 40/977) for selecting the combination pattern of (7) and (9) when the ally makes a strong attack or the ally makes a special attack when SCZ continuation is won Since the combination pattern is selected with probability, the special role is won depending on whether the battle effect of the pattern that the ally makes a strong attack or special attack was executed, or whether the battle effect of the other pattern was executed It is possible to infer whether the possibility is high or the possibility that the SCZ will continue is high, and it is possible to further enhance the interest by the battle production.

  In particular, in this embodiment, when the special role is elected, that is, when the ally finally wins, than when the ally wins the SCZ, that is, the ally does not lose but does not win. Because the ratio of the battle production is increased based on the pattern superior to allies (strong attack with stronger attack and special attacks compared to weak attacks), the contents and final results of the production show In addition to the fact that the contents match and the winning of a special role with a higher advantage than the SCZ continuation is shown, since the ratio of favors of allies increases, the superiority of the result that is finally reported as the superiority or inferiority of the production also Since it matches, the content shown by the battle effect can be made easier to understand.

  In this embodiment, the ally attack pattern is exemplified as a pattern dominant to the ally. For example, a pattern with a large number of allies, a pattern with a small number of enemies, a weapon possessed by the ally is large, a weapon Any pattern that seems to be easy for the team to win, such as a pattern with a strong type of attack or a pattern with weak enemy defense, is acceptable. In addition, when the above-described competition effect is applied, a pattern in which the enemy level is weak or the ally vehicle or item is strong may be applied as the dominant pattern. In addition, when a game effect is applied, a powerful pattern or the like may be applied as a dominant pattern with respect to a hand handed to a friend to a hand handed to an enemy. In addition, when a mission effect is applied, a pattern that achieves an objective at an early stage or a pattern that has a low difficulty level of the objective may be applied as a dominant pattern.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the game control board 40 can be connected to the test apparatus 1300 via the interface (IF) board (main) 1100, and a test signal is sent from the test apparatus 1300 to the game. In addition to being input to the control board 40, a test signal generated in relation to the game result is output from the game control board 40 to the test apparatus 1300. The game control board 40 and the test apparatus By connecting 1300, a simulation test can be automatically performed.

  FIG. 33 shows the test signal output from the game control board 40 to the test apparatus 1300 via the IF board (main) 1100 and the game control board 40 from the test apparatus 1300 via the IF board (main) 1100. It is a figure which shows the signal for a test input.

  As shown in FIG. 33, a turn-on request ramp signal, a start ready ramp signal, a BB in-progress signal, an RB game in-progress signal, a replay game in-progress signal, a first to third reel stop possible ramp signal, a first to third reel index signal, a payout Request signal, payout count signal, stop signal, 7-segment display a to g signal for setting value display, internal winning flag 1 to 4 signal, internal winning flag 5 to 8 signal, first reel motor excitation signal, second reel motor An excitation signal and a third reel motor excitation signal are output from the game control board 40 to the test apparatus 1300 as test signals.

  Test signals output from the game control board 40 to the test apparatus 1300 are output under the control of the main CPU 41a.

  The insertion request lamp signal is a drive signal of the insertion request LED 17, that is, a signal indicating whether or not the insertion request LED 17 is lit, and can specify whether or not a medal insertion is requested.

  The start enable lamp signal is a drive signal of the start valid LED 18, that is, a signal indicating whether or not the start valid LED 18 is lit, and can specify whether or not a game start operation is requested. .

  The BB in-progress signal, RB game in-progress signal, and replay game in-progress signal are signals indicating that the gaming state is BB, during RB, and during the replay game, respectively, and the gaming state at that time can be specified.

  The first to third reel stop enable lamp signals are signals indicating whether the left, middle and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C and 22R are driven, that is, whether the left, middle and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C and 22R are lit. It is possible to specify whether or not the left reel, middle reel, and right reel can be stopped.

  The first to third reel index signals are detection signals of the reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R, and can specify the passage of the reference positions of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel.

  The payout request signal is a drive signal for the hopper motor 34b, that is, a signal indicating whether or not the hopper motor 34b is being driven, and it is possible to specify that a medal payout operation is being performed.

  The payout count signal is a signal that is output every time a medal payout associated with winning is detected, and is a signal that causes the test apparatus 1300 to count the payout of medals.

  The stop signal is a signal indicating that the stop state is controlled.

  The 7-segment display a to g signals for setting value display are drive signals for the LEDs constituting each segment of the setting value display 24, and the setting values displayed on the setting value display 24 can be specified. .

  Each of the internal winning flags 1 to 4 is a 4-bit parallel signal, and the winning status of the general combination can be specified. In this embodiment, 0 (H) = losing, 1 (H) = replay (1), 2 (H) = replay (2), 3 (H) = replay (3), 4 (H) = replay (4 ), 5 (H) = Replay (5), 6 (H) = Replay (6), 7 (H) = Replay (7), 8 (H) = Replay (8), 9 (H) = Replay (9) ), 10 (H) = Replay (10), 11 (H) = Black watermelon, 12 (H) = White watermelon, 13 (H) = Cherry, 14 (H) = 1 sheet, 15 (H) = Bell Show.

  Each of the internal winning flags 5 to 8 is a 4-bit parallel signal, and the winning status of the special role can be specified. In this embodiment, 0 (H) = loss, 1 (H) = BB (1), 2 (H) = BB (2), 3 (H) = RB.

  The first to third reel motor excitation signals are drive signals for the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, that is, the reel motors that drive the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel, and the drive status of each reel can be specified. .

  As shown in FIG. 33, the insertion switch signal, reel start switch signal, first to third reel stop switch signal, payout switch signal, stop release switch signal, setting key switch signal, and setting switch signal are tested as test signals. Input from the device 1300 to the game control board 40. These test signals are signals that function in the same manner as the detection signals of the various switches and sensors provided in the slot machine 1, and these test signals are detected by the switch detection circuit 44 provided in the game control board 40 and are detected by the main CPU 41a. Detection of a switch or sensor corresponding to each test signal is determined.

  The insertion switch signal is a signal corresponding to the insertion medal sensor 31, and the reel start switch signal is a signal corresponding to the start switch 7. The first to third reel stop switch signals are signals corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, respectively. The payout switch signal is a signal corresponding to the payout sensor 34c. The stop release switch signal is a signal corresponding to the reset switch 23. The setting key switch signal is a signal corresponding to the setting key switch 37. The setting switch signal is a signal corresponding to the reset / setting switch 38.

  In the present embodiment, the game control board 40 is provided with a connection terminal to which wiring from the IF board (main) 1100 can be connected, and test signals output from the main control unit 41 and various drive circuits are received. A wiring pattern for transmitting to the connection terminal and a wiring pattern for transmitting a test signal from the connection terminal to the switch detection circuit 44 are formed, and output from the main control unit 41 on which the main CPU 41a is mounted and various drive circuits. The test signal thus output is output via the wiring pattern and the connection terminal, and the test signal input via the connection terminal and the wiring pattern is input to the switch detection circuit 44.

  In addition, the connection terminals are constituted by, for example, signal pins that can connect a probe from the IF board (main) 1100 and connectors that can connect a cable from the IF board (main) 1100. Thus, the wiring from the IF board (main) 1100 can be easily connected.

  The connection terminals are provided for the convenience of connecting the IF board (main) 1100, and the connection terminals for inputting / outputting these test signals and test signals are shipped to game stores. This is not necessary for the game control board 40 of the slot machine. For this reason, the gaming control board 40 of the present embodiment has a plurality of cutting holes for cutting the portion provided with the connection terminals, and can be cut along these cutting holes. At the time of shipment, the portion where the connection terminal is provided can be cut to a state where an unnecessary signal cannot be input / output. This makes it easy to use test signals for purposes other than testing, such as detecting internal winning flag signals in hall equipment, identifying the winning status of the internal winning flag from the internal winning flag signal, and notifying the fact. Can be prevented. Further, it is possible to prevent an unnecessary signal from being easily input to the game control board 40.

  The number of slot machines provided for testing by a third-party organization is usually only a few. In addition, the slot machines for mass production shipped to amusement stores can input and output these test signals and test signals. Since it is less necessary to carry out, these mass production slot machines may be equipped with the game control board 40 that is provided with the wiring pattern but is not provided with the connection terminals described above. The manufacturing cost of the slot machine can be reduced. Further, in this case, since a wiring pattern for transmitting a test signal and a test signal is formed on the game control board 40, the IF board (main) 1100 and the test apparatus 1300 can be easily configured only by mounting the connection terminals. It becomes possible to connect to. In addition, only a test slot machine is provided with a wiring pattern for transmitting a test signal and a test signal, and a connection terminal for connection with the IF board (main) 1100 and the test apparatus 1300. A configuration in which these wiring patterns and connection terminals are not provided may be employed. That is, the main CPU 41a controls the output of the test signal, but the test signal may not be actually output. Thereby, the manufacturing cost of the slot machine for mass production can be further reduced.

  Next, input / output states of test signals and test signals between the game control board 40 and the test apparatus 1300 at the time of testing will be described using the timing chart shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 34, first, when a medal can be inserted, the insertion request LED 17 is turned on, the insertion request lamp signal is turned ON, and an output request for the insertion switch signal is made to the test apparatus 1300. Based on this, the insertion switch signal is input from the test apparatus 1300, and the game can be started by detecting the insertion switch signal for a specified number of times according to the gaming state. The enable lamp signal is turned ON, and an output request for a reel start switch signal is made to the test apparatus 1300. In addition, when performing a test, the use of credits is prohibited, so that it becomes impossible to insert medals by detecting a predetermined number of insertion switch signals, the insertion request LED 17 is turned off, and the insertion request lamp signal is turned OFF. To. Along with this, the closing switch signal is also stopped.

  When the reel start switch signal from the test apparatus 1300 is detected, the start valid LED 18 is turned off and the start ready lamp signal is turned OFF. And an internal lottery process is performed and the output state of the internal winning flag signals 1-4 and 5-8 is updated based on the result.

  Thereafter, when the reel starts to rotate at a constant speed and the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is validated, the left, middle, and right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R are turned on, and the first Turn on the 3 reel stop possible lamp. Based on this, any one of the first to third reel stop switch signals is input from the test apparatus 200, and when any of the first to third reel stop switch signals is detected, the left, middle, and right stop are valid. The corresponding LED among the LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R is turned off, and the corresponding first to third reel stop possible lamps are turned off. Then, after controlling the reels corresponding to the detected first to third reel stop switch signals, the stop effective LED corresponding to the rotating reel is turned on again, and the corresponding reel stop possible lamp is turned ON. To do.

  When these processes are repeatedly performed and all reels are stopped, it is determined whether or not the winning symbol combination is stopped. If the symbol combination accompanied by the medal payout is determined, the hopper motor The drive signal 34b is output, the payout request signal is turned ON, and the payout switch signal is output. Accordingly, a payout switch signal is input from the test apparatus 1300. By detecting the payout switch signal, the number of payout medals is counted, and payout switch signals for the number corresponding to the combination of winning symbols are displayed. When detected, the output of the drive signal of the hopper motor 34b is stopped and the payout request signal is turned OFF. Accordingly, the input of the payout switch signal is also stopped.

  Next, when the gaming state changes according to the combination of symbols, after the driving signal of the hopper motor 34b is stopped, that is, after the payout request signal is turned off, the output state of the test signal indicating the gaming state is changed. For example, when a combination of BB (1), BB (2), and the like is prepared and the BB is shifted to BB, the BB signal is changed from OFF to ON. Thereafter, when the medal can be inserted again, the insertion request LED 17 is turned on, and the insertion request lamp signal is turned ON.

  Such a test signal and test signal exchange are performed between the slot machine and the test apparatus 1300, whereby a simulation test is automatically performed. It is possible to output the payout rate of the slot machine. Specifically, the ratio of the number of times when the payout count signal is detected during the period to be tested (the number of medals to be paid out) to the number of times the insertion switch signal is output during the period to be tested (the number of medals consumed) is calculated. The result (consumption number / payout number) is output as the payout rate.

  In recent years, it is possible to align the winning roles on the condition that an operation that satisfies the winning conditions has been performed, and by notifying the winning conditions, the payout rate is higher than when there is no notification of winning conditions. There is also a slot machine. In such a slot machine, the payout rate in the test and the payout rate in the market are different, and the test cannot be performed accurately. By outputting the indicated test signal, the test device can perform the test in a form close to that the player actually plays in the market, and the payout rate by the test can be made as close as possible to the market payout rate. Such a slot machine has been proposed.

  However, although the advantageous operation procedure changes according to the gaming state recently, the advantageous operation procedure is not notified (for example, when a special role is won during RT (1) as in this embodiment, RT It is possible to continue RT (1) until the specified number of games is reached without ending (1). However, if the special combination wins even before reaching the specified number of games, RT (1 ) Will end, and it will be more advantageous for the player to win the special role won when the special role is won in the initial game state or RT (2), but it is special during RT (1) If the winning combination is won, it is advantageous for the player not to win the special winning until the RT (1) is finished.) And the operation procedure as the winning condition is not clearly notified, Added the player's background knowledge (For example, when the replay GR (1) to (3) that will end the initial gaming state is won as shown in this embodiment, the left reel, the middle Either the reel or the right reel is notified, but if it is not known that a stop operation is recommended as the notified first stop reel, it is advantageous for the player when the notified reel is first stopped. It is not possible to specify whether it will be advantageous to the player when the reels other than the notified reel are stopped first, and what kind of replay among the replays GR (1) to (3) is simply used. When notifying of whether the GR is won or not, if the correlation between the stop order of the reels and the type of the replay GR that has been won is not known, which stop order is the most out of a plurality of types of stop orders. It is not possible to specify whether the stopping order is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state advantageous to the player, such as RT (1) or the initial gaming state, is ended when winning a specific role such as a cherry that has been missed. In some cases, it is advantageous for a player not to win a cherry if it is an advantageous game state that is ended by winning a specific role, but in other game states, a medal is paid out. It is more advantageous for the player, and it is generally impossible to specify which operation procedure is advantageous.), And only by outputting a test signal indicating the operation procedure that satisfies the notified winning condition, There was a problem that the payout rate obtained by the test and the payout rate in the market were different.

  For this reason, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 33, the effect control board 90 can be connected to the test apparatus 1300 via the IF board (sub) 1200, and the control of the main CPU 41a is performed from the effect control board 90. It is possible to output a test signal indicating the most recommended operation procedure among the operation procedures that can be selected by the player according to the current gaming state to be performed and the effect mode by the sub CPU 91a.

  FIG. 33 is a diagram showing test signals output from the effect control board 90 to the test apparatus 1300 via the IF board (sub) 1200.

  As shown in FIG. 33, a stop execution position signal, a stop reel designation signal, a stop strobe signal, a signal, and a game interruption signal are output from the effect control board 90 to the test apparatus 1300 as test signals.

  Test signals output from the effect control board 90 to the test apparatus 1300 are output under the control of the sub CPU 91a.

  The stop execution position signal is a signal indicating the most recommended stop operation position for the reel indicated by the stop reel designation signal described later according to the current gaming state and effect mode, and the corresponding reel included in the most recommended stop operation position. The number of steps (0 to 167) of the reel motor can be specified.

  The stop reel designation signal is a signal that designates whether the reel that recommends the stop operation at the stop operation position indicated by the stop execution position signal is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel. The reel to which the stop operation at the stop operation position indicated by the execution position signal is applied can be specified.

  The stop strobe signal is a signal for requesting acquisition of a stop execution position signal and a stop reel designation signal.

  The game interruption signal is a signal for requesting a temporary interruption of the test by the test apparatus 1300, and is a signal that is output when prompting selection of an effect mode or the like by a manual operation.

  In the present embodiment, the production control board 90 is provided with connection terminals to which the wiring from the IF board (sub) 1200 can be connected, and the test signals output from the sub control section 91 and various drive circuits are received. Wiring patterns for transmitting to the connection terminals are formed, and test signals output from the sub control unit 91 on which the sub CPU 91a is mounted and various driving circuits are output via these wiring patterns and connection terminals. ing.

  In addition, the connection terminal is configured by, for example, a signal pin capable of connecting a probe from the IF board (sub) 1200 and a connector to which a cable from the IF board (sub) 1200 can be connected. Thus, the wiring from the IF substrate (sub) 1200 can be easily connected.

  The connection terminals are provided for the convenience of connecting the IF board (sub) 1200, and the connection terminals for outputting these test signals are the effects of the slot machine shipped to the amusement store. The control board 90 is not necessary. For this reason, the production control board 90 of this embodiment is formed with a plurality of cutting holes for cutting the portion provided with the connection terminals, and can be cut along these cutting holes. At the time of shipment, the portion where the connection terminal is provided can be cut to a state where an unnecessary signal cannot be input / output. Thereby, for example, it is possible to prevent the test signal from being easily used for purposes other than the test, such as specifying a recommended operation procedure in the hall device and notifying the fact. Further, it is possible to prevent an unnecessary signal from being easily input to the effect control board 90.

  Note that the number of slot machines provided for testing by a third party organization is usually only a few, and other slot machines for mass production shipped to amusement stores are less likely to output these test signals. Therefore, these mass production slot machines may be provided with the effect control board 90 which is provided with the wiring pattern but is not provided with the above-described connection terminals, thereby making it possible to manufacture the mass production slot machine. Can be reduced. Further, in this case, since the wiring pattern for transmitting the test signal to the effect control board 90 is formed, the IF board (sub) 1200 and the test apparatus 1300 can be easily connected only by mounting the connection terminals. Is possible. In addition, a wiring pattern for transmitting a test signal only to the test slot machine and a connection terminal for connecting to the IF board (sub) 1200 and the test apparatus 1300 are provided. It is good also as a structure which does not provide a connection terminal. That is, the sub CPU 91a may control the output of the test signal, but the test signal may not be actually output. Thereby, the manufacturing cost of the slot machine for mass production can be further reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 35, the sub CPU 91a has a maximum of 2 seconds from the time when the main CPU 41a outputs the reel start switch signal (in fact, when the sub CPU 91a receives the internal winning command indicating the start of the game from the main CPU 41a). In the meantime, according to the current gaming state (the gaming state indicated by the gaming state command received at the end of the previous game) and the production mode (the production mode of the game by the sub CPU 91a), first the stop reel designation signal is sent to the first stop reel. Updated to the output state indicating the recommended reel, and the stop execution position signal is updated to the output state indicating the recommended stop operation position for the reel, and after the update of the stop reel designation signal and the stop execution position signal is completed The stop strobe signal is output for a fixed time (50 ms), and the recommended first stop reset signal is output. Notify Le and the stop operation position to the test device 1300, after the stop of the stop strobe signal, a predetermined time (50 ms) to wait. Next, in a similar procedure, the test apparatus 1300 is notified of the second stop reel and its stop operation position that are sequentially recommended, and the test apparatus 1300 is notified of the third stop reel and its stop operation position. After the notification of the third stop reel and its stop operation position, the stop execution position signal and the stop reel designation signal are cleared when a certain time (50 ms) has passed. That is, according to the recommended stop order, the first stop reel and its stop operation position, the second stop reel and its stop operation position, the third stop reel and its stop operation position are sequentially notified to the test apparatus 1300, so that the test is performed. The operation procedure recommended by the apparatus 1300 can be specified.

  The ROM 91b stores a recommended operation procedure table in which recommended operation procedures are registered in advance according to the current game state and effect mode, and the sub CPU 91a stores an operation procedure that matches the current game state and effect mode. Obtained from the recommended operation procedure table and outputting a stop execution position signal and a stop reel designation signal based on the obtained operation procedure. Note that the recommended operation procedure table registered in advance may not be provided, and the recommended operation procedure may be acquired using a program in which the sub CPU 91a determines the recommended operation procedure based on the gaming state and effect mode at that time.

  In the present embodiment, in the initial gaming state, RT (1), RT (2) in the state where the small role notification effect and stop order notification is not made, the player can not specify the result of the internal lottery, Black watermelons and white watermelons have the largest number of payouts, and there is no penalty for winning black watermelons and white watermelons, so pulling in “black watermelon” or “white watermelon” for any reel. When a stop operation is performed at a timing that falls within the range, the payout rate is higher than in other operation procedures, so a stop execution position signal that indicates the stop operation position that is the pull-in range of “black watermelon” or “white watermelon”, respectively. Is output. In particular, in the present embodiment, there is a stop operation position where both “black watermelon” and “cherry” can be pulled in on the right reel, and particularly in the right reel, both the “black watermelon” and “cherry” pull-in ranges A stop execution position signal indicating the stop operation position is output.

  In the initial gaming state, when a special effect indicating that the special role has been elected has been performed and the small role notification effect has not been made, the player can specify that the special role has been won, There is no disadvantage even if you win the prize, and the person who removes wastes medals, so if you stop the operation at the timing that will be the drawing range of the constituent figure of the special role won for any reel, Since the payout rate is higher than in other operation procedures, a stop execution position signal indicating a stop operation position that is a drawing range of the constituent symbol of the selected special role is output.

  In RT (1), it is not possible to specify whether or not the special role is won. In this embodiment, when the special role is won in RT (1), after RT (1) starts, the specified number of games is reached. RT (1) will end even before the game is completed, and in RT (1), the payout rate will be higher for those who do not win the special role than if they win the special role. A stop execution position signal indicating the stop operation position that is outside the drawing range of the configuration symbol is output.

  When a small role announcement effect is executed in the initial gaming state, RT (1), (2), the player can specify the type of the small role won in the internal lottery, There are no disadvantages, so if you perform a stop operation at a timing that is within the drawing range of the constituent symbol of the selected small role for any reel, the payout rate will be higher than the other operation procedures, so each was won A stop execution position signal indicating a stop operation position that is a drawing range of the constituent symbol of the small role is output. In particular, when a small role notification effect indicating the winning of cherry is executed, a stop execution position signal indicating a stop operation position that is a drawing range of the “cherry” symbol is output as a stop execution position signal of the right reel.

  In addition, in the initial gaming state, RT (1), (2), when a small role announcement effect that suggests winning of a plurality of types of small roles is executed, the player will each of the types of small roles won in the internal lottery Because it is possible to identify the small role that has the highest advantage among the winning small roles for all reels (the small role with a large number of payouts, the number of payouts is small or equivalent, but when viewed in multiple games) If the stop operation is performed at a timing that is within the drawing range of the constituent symbol (such as a small role whose number of payouts will increase), the payout rate will be higher than other operating procedures, so the drawing range of the constituent symbol of the selected small role A stop execution position signal indicating the stop operation position is output.

  In the initial gaming state, RT (2), when an effect suggesting both the winning of the small role and the winning of the special role is executed, the notification effect indicating the winning of the special role has already been performed and the small role notification When the performance is executed, the player can specify that the special role has been won and that the small role has been won. In this case, if the selected small role is a small role that receives more medals than the number of medals necessary to start the next game, even if the special role is won, no medals will be paid out. Since winning a winning combination will earn more medals, if you perform a stop operation at the timing that will be the drawing range of the constituent symbol of the winning small role for any reel, the payout rate will be higher than other operating procedures Therefore, the stop execution position signal indicating the stop operation position that is the drawing range of the constituent symbols of the selected winning combination is output. In addition, if the drawing range of the constituent symbol of the selected special role overlaps with the drawing range of the constituent symbol of the selected small role, if the stop operation is performed at that timing, the special symbol component symbol will be drawn and the selected small role will be drawn Can not be won, so a stop execution position signal indicating the stop operation position that is within the drawing range of the winning symbol's constituent symbol and out of the winning special role's drawing range is output as the stop execution position signal. .

  In addition, if the selected small role is given a small number of medals that is the same as the number of medals required to start the next game, winning the selected small role will not increase the number of medals. In the next game, there is a possibility that a small role that will receive more medals than the number of medals necessary to start the next game may be won, and there is a possibility that more medals can be won. Also, if the stop operation is performed at the timing that becomes the drawing range of the constituent symbol of the selected small role, the payout rate will be higher than other operating procedures, so each stop that becomes the drawing range of the constituent symbol of the selected small role A stop execution position signal indicating the operation position is output.

  On the other hand, if the winning small role has a medal less than the number of medals required to start the next game, the winning game will be awarded when the winning small role is awarded. Since more medals are required than the number of medals awarded, and the number of medals will decrease, if any stop operation is performed at the timing of the drawing range of the constituent figure of the special role won for any reel, Since the payout rate is higher than that in the operation procedure, a stop execution position signal indicating a stop operation position that is a drawing range of the constituent symbols of the selected special roles is output.

  When the stop order notification indicating the left reel is executed in the initial gaming state, it can be specified that either the replay GR (1) or the replay GR (4) is won, and the first reel is designated as the first reel. Even if it is a stop or a reel other than the left reel is set to the first stop, any re-game player always wins, but if a reel other than the left reel is set to the first stop, RT (2 The replay (1) that will shift to (1) may win, and the payout rate will be low in the long run. Therefore, the stop execution position signal is output in the order of left, middle, and right reels.

  When the stop order notification indicating the middle reel is executed in the initial gaming state, it can be specified that the replay GR (2) is won, and even if the middle reel is set to the first stop, other than the middle reel Even if one of the reels is set to the first stop, any re-playing player always wins, but if a reel other than the middle reel is set to the first stop, the replay (to be transferred to RT (2)) 1) wins and the payout rate decreases in the long run, so the stop execution position signal is output in the order of the middle, left, and right reels.

  When the stop order notification indicating the right reel is executed in the initial gaming state, it can be specified that the replay GR (3) is won, and even if the right reel is set to the first stop, other than the right reel Even if one of the reels is stopped for the first time, one of the re-game players always wins, but if a reel other than the right reel is made the first stop, the replay (RT (2)) will be entered. 1) wins, and the payout rate decreases in the long run. Therefore, stop execution position signals are output in the order of right, left, and middle reels.

  As described above, in this embodiment, multiple types of roles (e.g., multiple types of replays, multiple types of small roles with the same payout number, etc.) with the same value (number of medals or replays) are won simultaneously, The player can select which combination to win depending on the difference, and the advantage for the player changes according to the type of the winning combination. If the player is elected at the same time and the player can identify that fact, the payout rate will be higher than the other operation procedures when the stop operation is performed in the operation procedure that wins the winning combination of the player. Therefore, when a plurality of types of roles having the same value are elected at the same time and the player can specify that fact, the role that is advantageous to the player as the respective stop execution position signal and stop reel designation signal. To win A signal indicating the operation procedure and outputs.

  Also, in this embodiment, the number of payouts that is the BB end condition is 300, and if a small role with a payout other than 15 such as cherry or 1 is awarded even once during the BB, The net increase in the number of BBs (the number of payouts—the number used for the number of bets) may be smaller than when no winning is made. For this reason, in the BB, when the right reel stop operation is performed at a timing outside the “cherry” pull-in range, the payout rate becomes higher than other operation procedures. A stop execution position signal indicating a stop operation position outside the “cherry” pull-in range is output. In addition, when a stop operation is performed on all reels at a timing that is outside the drawing range of one component symbol in any of the reels, the payout rate is higher than in other operation procedures. As a signal, a stop execution position signal indicating a stop operation position that falls outside the drawing range of one component symbol is output.

  In this embodiment, if a small role with a payout other than 15 is won at least once during BB, the net increase in the number of BB (the number of payouts—the number used for the number of bets) will be greater than when no winning is made. However, for example, if the BB end condition is 299 and only the first small role with 15 payouts in the BB wins, payouts other than 15 are paid out. A configuration in which the second small combination (for example, a small combination with 14 payouts) is won one or more times in a predetermined number of times may result in a larger number of net increase. In a situation in which the player can specify that the winning of the other small role is allowed (when it is always allowed or when it is notified that it is allowed), the number of winnings of the second small role is determined in advance. If you have not reached the given number of times, the operating procedure to win the second small role If the stop operation is performed and if the number of winnings of the second small role has reached a predetermined number of times, when the stop operation is performed in an operation procedure that does not win the second small role, However, since the payout rate is high, the number of winnings for the second small role must have reached a predetermined number in a situation where the player can specify that the winning of the second small role is permitted. For example, a signal indicating an operation procedure for winning the second small combination is output as each stop execution position signal and stop reel designation signal, and the number of winning of the second small combination has reached a predetermined number of times. For example, as the stop execution position signal and stop reel designation signal, a signal indicating an operation procedure for not winning the second small combination is output.

  In addition, in the same game, if the first small role and the second small role can be selected by the difference in the operation procedure, it is possible to select the first small role and the second small role. If the number of winnings of the second small role has not reached a predetermined number in a situation where the player can be specified (when it is always selectable or when it is notified that selection is possible), the second small When the stop operation is performed according to the operation procedure for winning the winning combination, and the stop operation is performed according to the operation procedure that does not allow the winning of the first winning combination if the number of winning of the second winning combination has reached a predetermined number of times. In addition, since the payout rate is higher than in other operation procedures, in a situation where the player can specify that the first small role and the second small role can be selected, the number of winnings of the second small role is If the predetermined number of times has not been reached, each stop execution position signal and stop If a signal indicating an operation procedure for winning the second small combination is output as the designation signal, and the number of winning of the second small combination has reached a predetermined number of times, the respective stop execution position signal and stop reel A signal indicating an operation procedure for not winning the first small combination as a designation signal is output.

  In this embodiment, control is performed to stop the display result on the corresponding reel on condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected. However, the reel starts to rotate. When a predetermined automatic stop time has elapsed, even if the reel stop operation is not performed, it is assumed that the stop operation has been performed and each reel is automatically stopped, Even in the case of winning, a display result that does not constitute any combination may be derived. In this case, for example, a combination that is disadvantageous to the player (RT is terminated by winning, RT is continued by removing it) If you win a prize, it will not shift to RT, but it will shift to RT when you remove it, etc.). If a winning combination is won, waiting for the automatic stop time will automatically stop the reels and remove the winning combination will result in a higher payout rate than when stopping the reel by performing a stop operation. Therefore, it is a disadvantageous role for the player, and when a stop that is not lost when it is stopped by a stop operation is won and the player can specify that fact, the stop execution position signal and stop reel designation signal In the game, it is preferable to output a signal indicating that it is advantageous not to output a reel stop switch signal indicating a stop operation.

  Thus, in this embodiment, even when there are a plurality of stop operation procedures that can be selected by the player when the winning combination is notified, the stop operation procedure that is advantageous among the plurality of stop operation procedures is performed. Since the stop execution position signal and stop reel designation signal indicating the acquired stop operation procedure are output to the test apparatus 1300, the stop operation that can be selected by the player when the type of the winning combination is notified Even when there are a plurality of procedures, it is possible to output a reel stop switch signal in a manner indicating a stop operation procedure that is advantageous for the player on the test apparatus 1300 side, and it is close to the market payout rate by the test by the test apparatus 1300 A payout rate can be obtained.

  Further, in this embodiment, even when a notification such as a small role notification effect, that is, a notification suggesting the result of the internal lottery is not performed, the payout rate is the highest in a situation where the player cannot specify the result of the internal lottery. Since a stop execution position signal and a stop reel designation signal indicating a high stop operation procedure are output to the test apparatus 1300, there is a stop operation procedure that is particularly advantageous from notification etc. when a player actually plays a game. Even if not, if the player's advantage changes according to the stop operation procedure, it is possible to output the reel stop switch signal in the stop operation procedure that is most advantageous to the player on the test apparatus 1300 side. Thus, by a test by the test apparatus 1300, a payout rate close to the highest payout rate among the market payout rates can be obtained.

  In the present embodiment, in a state where notification such as a small role announcement effect is not performed, that is, in a situation where the player cannot specify the result of the internal lottery, a stop execution position signal and a stop reel indicating a recommended stop operation procedure The designation signal may not be output to the test apparatus 1300. In this way, when outputting the stop execution position signal and the stop reel designation signal, an advantageous stop operation procedure is selected from a plurality of stop operation procedures. Since the control to be selected can be omitted, the control load related to the output control of the stop execution position signal and the stop reel designation signal can be reduced. Even in this case, it is preferable that a stop execution position signal and a stop reel designation signal indicating an arbitrary stop operation procedure are output to the test apparatus 1300. In this way, a stop execution position signal is output in all games. Since the stop reel designation signal is output, the test apparatus can start outputting the reel stop switch signal on condition that the stop execution position signal and the stop reel designation signal are detected. Can be optimized according to the state of the slot machine. That is, the test apparatus 1300 can start outputting the reel stop switch signal at the earliest timing at which it can be determined whether or not the recommended stop operation procedure exists, and the test can be performed smoothly.

  Further, in this embodiment, a signal that can specify the number of steps of the reel motor corresponding to the output timing of the stop switch signal recommended as the stop execution position signal is output to the test apparatus 1300. Even when the number of symbols and the number of steps assigned to one symbol differ depending on the type of slot machine, the test apparatus 1300 can share the output control of the stop switch signal with respect to the stop execution position signal.

  In this embodiment, after the game is over, the timing at which the insertion of a medal is first detected, the timing at which the start operation is detected after the start operation becomes valid, the timing at which the stop operation is performed, and the touch panel The sub CPU 91a outputs a game interruption signal to the test apparatus 1300 to request a temporary interruption of the test when the operation mode of the operation means such as the operation shifts to a state in which the effect mode or the effect mode can be changed. It is like that.

  For example, the stop execution position of the third stop reel when the presentation mode and the presentation mode can be changed by the operation of the presentation operation means after the game is finished, or after the game is finished. If the game interruption signal is output after the completion of the output of the signal and the stop reel designation signal, and the effect mode and effect mode can be changed at the timing when the start operation is detected, the start operation becomes effective after the game ends. If the effect mode or effect mode can be changed by outputting the game interruption signal and stopping the operation or operating the effect operating means during the rotation of the reel, after the start operation is detected, the reel A game interruption signal is output before the stop operation becomes effective.

  As a result, even if the simulation test is automatically performed by the test apparatus 1300, when the effect mode or effect mode can be changed by manual operation, the game interruption signal is output, Is temporarily interrupted, and it is possible to restart the test after selecting the production mode and production mode by manual operation. For example, the small role notification production and the falling role type notification are executed by the production mode and production mode. Even if the frequency changes or the payout rate changes accordingly, it is not the payout rate obtained by chance and the play mode selected by chance during the automatic test, but the play mode and play mode. An accurate payout rate according to the difference can be obtained.

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described with reference to the drawings, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and modifications and additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, the stop control by the stop control table created from the table creation data registered in advance in the ROM 41b (hereinafter also referred to as the table method) is applied as the reel stop control method. You can search for the retractable position at each stop operation timing, and apply stop control based on the search result (hereinafter also referred to as the control method), or stop control using both the table method and the control method (hereinafter table + control). May also be applied.

  Moreover, you may use these several systems together. For example, as a result of the internal lottery, by using both the table-type stop control and the control-type stop control according to the reel stop time (first stop, second stop, or third stop), As a result of all the internal lotteries, it is not necessary to prepare a stop control table in advance for all the stop times of the reels, so that the storage capacity of the stop control table can be reduced.

  In addition, depending on the timing of the stop operation, when a winning combination is missed, the stop control is performed by the table method using the stop control table for a relatively larger number of stopping times than when the winning combination is won. It is possible to diversify display results when a winning combination is won and the winning combination is missed.

  In particular, among the roles in which a special combination is missed, the display results when the special combination is missed can be diversified by performing stop control by the table method using the stop control table when the special combination is elected. In addition, even in the case of a loss that has not been won by any of the roles, it is possible to diversify the display results in the case of a loss by performing stop control using the table method using the stop control table. The degree of freedom in designing the display results that can appear both when winning a role and when not winning is expanded. That is, since the stop position in the case of losing can be limited by the stop control table, it is easy to adjust the stop position and the appearance ratio that are likely to be selected as a special role.

  On the other hand, when a role that does not miss is elected, the relationship with the display result when the special role is missed is weak. In other words, since a special role cannot be expected when a role that does not miss out appears, there is little need to diversify display results when a role that does not miss out is won. For this reason, when a winning combination that does not miss is won, stop control is effectively performed by performing stop control by a control method that does not use the stop control table for a relatively large number of stopping times than when winning a winning combination. It is possible to reduce the storage capacity of the table. That is, the display results can be varied according to the nature of the result of the internal lottery, and the storage capacity of the stop control table can be reduced.

  In addition, since the stop control is always performed in the table system for the first stop, the number of sliding symbols that will not stop from the stop control table selected when the special role is won is determined from the stop control table selected when the special role is not won. Control for deriving a reach (so-called 1st) that is established when a display result is derived for the first stop reel by selecting the registered stop control table and performing the first stop control. It becomes possible to design easily.

  In the above embodiment, when any special combination wins after RT (1) starts, RT (1) ends when the specified number of games is reached without winning any special combination. However, RT (1) may be ended when the falling combination wins.

  In the above embodiment, a slot machine for setting bets using medals and credits is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a slot machine for setting bets using game balls, It may be a full credit type slot machine that uses only credits to set the number of bets.

  Further, in addition to the medal insertion mechanism such as the flow path switching solenoid 30 and the insertion medal sensor 31, a ball take-in device that takes in a game ball, and a take-in ball that detects a game ball taken in by the ball take-in device In addition to a medal payout mechanism, such as a hopper motor 34b and a payout sensor 34c, a ball payout device for paying out game balls, and a payout ball detection switch for detecting game balls paid out by the ball payout device It is possible to set a bet number using both medals and game balls and play a game, and the present invention may be applied to a slot machine in which medals and game balls are paid out by winning.

1 Slot machine 2L, 2C, 2R Reel 7 Start switch 8L, 8C, 8R Stop switch 32L, 32C, 32R Reel motor 34 Hopper unit 35 Overflow tank 35a Full tank sensor 41 Main controller 41a CPU
41b ROM
41c RAM
91 Sub-control unit 91a CPU
91b ROM
91c RAM

Claims (1)

Equipped with a plurality of variable display parts that display fluctuations with a stepping motor,
After variably displaying the variable display part, the display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display part, and a winning can be generated according to the combination of the display results of the plurality of variable display parts, and the test of the game A slot machine capable of automatically playing a game in relation to input of a test signal from a test apparatus connected when performing,
The first board that controls the game is
Derivation control means for performing control for deriving a display result on a variable display unit corresponding to the derivation operation when a test derivation operation signal indicating the derivation operation is input;
A pre-determining means for deciding whether or not to allow the winning to occur before the display result is derived;
A determination result signal output control means for performing control to output a determination result signal for causing the test apparatus to specify the determination result of the prior determination means;
A step number specifying signal output control means for performing control to output a step number specifying signal for causing the test apparatus to specify the number of elapsed steps from the reference position of the stepping motor of each of the plurality of variable display units;
Determination result information output control means for performing control to output information based on the determination result of the prior determination means to the second substrate connected to the first substrate ;
Variable display start information output control means for performing control to output variable display start information to the second substrate in response to establishment of a variable display start condition;
Including
The second substrate includes derivation operation mode signal output control means for performing control to output a derivation operation mode signal for causing the test apparatus to specify an input mode of the test derivation operation signal,
The derivation operation mode signal is
A signal indicating the number of steps elapsed from the reference position of the stepping motor corresponding to the output timing of the test derivation operation signal for each of the plurality of variable display units,
When notification is made to indicate that the prior determination means has simultaneously determined that the first winning is permitted and the second winning that is more advantageous to the player than the first winning is determined. And a signal for instructing the input of the test derivation operation signal in a mode indicating the second derivation operation among the first derivation operation for generating the first prize and the second derivation operation for generating the second prize. ,
A slot which is a signal for instructing input of the test derivation operation signal in a mode indicating a derivation operation in a predetermined derivation operation procedure when notification indicating the determination result of the predetermination means is not performed Machine.

Images